Skip to main content

Full text of "Your mind and how to use it : a manual of practical psychology"

See other formats


LIBRARY 
jBrigham  Young  University 


70463 

Ace.  No. 


.-^nv 


1/ 


Oy 


/ 


v.,„^  -.V 


^\ 


\ 


'463 


"iK^M^.w^,  Alu  ()A^ 


YOUR  MIND 

AND  HOW  TG  USE  IT 


A  MANUAL  OF  PRACTICAL 
PSYCHOLOGY 


BY 

WILLIAM  WALKER  ATKINSON 


It  is  not  enough  merely  to  have  a  sound  mind — 
one  must  also  learn  how  to  use  it,  if  he  would 
become  mentally  efficient. 


PUBLISHED  BY 

THE  ELIZABETH  TOWNE  CO., 

HOLYOKE.  MASS. 


L.  N.  Fowler  &  Co.,  London. 


Copyright,  1911. 
ELIZABETH  TOWNE. 


Copyrighted  in  the  United  States  and  England. 


Contents. 


Chapter 

Page 

I. 

What  is  the  Mind 5 

11. 

The  Mechanism  of  Mental  States 

11 

III. 

The  Great  Nerve  Centers 

17 

IV. 

Consciousness 

24 

V. 

Attention     . 

29 

VI. 

Perception    . 

36 

VII. 

Memory. 

45 

VIII. 

Memory  (continued) 

54 

IX. 

Imagination  . 

62 

X. 

The  Feelings 

72 

XL 

The  Emotions 

79 

XII. 

The  Instinctive  Emotions 

.        88 

XIII. 

The  Passions        . 

96 

XIV. 

The  Social  Emotions 

.      104 

XV. 

The  Religious  Emotions    . 

.      Ill 

XVI. 

The  Esthetic  Emotions    . 

.      117 

XVII. 

Thr  Intellectual  Emotions 

.      125 

XVIII. 

The  Role  of  the  Emotions 

.      131 

XIX. 

The  Emotions  and  Happiness  . 

« 

.      136 

XX. 

The  Intellect     . 

»      143 

XXL 

Conception   .... 

.      151 

XXII. 

Classes  of  Concepts  . 

,      158 

XXIII. 

Judgments     .... 

.      164 

^XXIV. 

Primary  Laws  of  Thought 

.      171 

r  XXV. 

Reasoning 

,      176 

XXVI. 

Inductive  Reasoning  . 

,      181 

XXVII. 

Deductive  Reasoning  \     . 

.      186 

xxvm. 

Fallacious  Reasoning  *     . 

>      193 

XXIX. 

The  Will      .       .       .       . 

.      201 

XXX. 

Will-Training      .       .       . 

.      213 

XXXI. 

Will-Tonic    . 

•                          4 

,      219 

CHAPTER  I. 

What  is  the  Mind  ? 

PSYCHOLOGY  is  generally  considered  to  be  the 
science  of  mind,  although  more  properly  it  is 
the  science  of  mental  states — thoughts,  feel- 
ings, and  acts  of  volition.  It  was  formerly  the  custom 
of  writers  on  the  subject  of  psychology  to  begin  by  an 
attempt  to  define  and  describe  the  nature  of  mind, 
before  proceeding  to  a  consideration  of  the  subject  of 
the  various  mental  states  and  activities.  But  more 
recent  authorities  have  rebelled  against  this  demand, 
and  have  claimed  that  it  is  no  more  reasonable  to  hold 
that  psychology  should  be  held  to  an  explanation  of  the 
ultimate  nature  of  mind  than  it  is  that  physical  science 
be  held  to  an  explanation  of  the  ultimate  nature  of 
matter.  The  attempt  to  explain  the  ultimate  nature  of 
either  is  futile — no  actual  necessity  exists  for  explana- 
tion in  either  case.  Physics  may  explain  the  phenom- 
ena of  matter,  and  psychology  the  phenomena  of  mind, 
without  regard  to  the  ultimate  nature  of  the  substance 
of  either. 

The  science  of  physics  has  progressed  steadily  during 
the.  past  century,   notwithstanding  the   fact  that  the 


6        YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

theories  regarding  the  ultimate  nature  of  matter  have 
been  revolutionized  during  that  period.  The  facts  of 
the  phenomena  of  matter  remain,  notwithstanding  the 
change  of  theory  regarding  the  nature  of  matter  itself. 
Science  demands  and  holds  fast  to  facts,  regarding 
theories  as  but  working  hypotheses  at  the  best.  Some 
one  has  said  that  ^'theories  are  but  the  bubbles  with 
which  the  grown-up  children  of  science  amuse  them- 
selves/^ Science  holds  several  well-supported,  though 
opposing,  theories  regarding  the  nature  of  electricity, 
but  the  facts  of  the  phenomena  of  electricity,  and  the 
application  thereof,  are  agreed  upon  by  the  disputing 
theorists.  And  so  it  is  with  psychology;  the  facts  re- 
garding mental  states  are  agreed  upon,  and  methods  of 
developing  mental  powers  are  effectively  employed, 
without  regard  to  whether  mind  is  a  product  of  the 
brain,  or  the  brain  merely  an  organ  of  the  mind.  The 
fact  that  the  brain  and  nervous  system  are  employed 
in  the  phenomena  of  thought  is  conceded  by  all,  and 
that  is  all  that  is  necessary  for  a  basis  for  the  science  of 
psychology. 

Disputes  regarding  the  ultimate  nature  of  mind  are 
now  generally  passed  over  to  the  philosophers  and  meta- 
physicians, while  psychology  devotes  its  entire  attention 
to  studying  the  laws  of  mental  activities,  and  to  dis- 
covering methods  of  mental  development.     Even  phi- 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.        7 

losophy  is  beginning  to  tire  of  the  eternal  *^Svhy"  and 
is  devoting  its  attention  to  the  ^^how'^  phase  of  things. 
The  pragmatic  spirit  has  invaded  the  field  of  philos- 
ophy, expressing  itself  in  the  words  of  Prof.  William 
James,  who  said:  ^Tragmatism  is  the  attitude  of 
looking  away  from  first  things,  principles,  categories, 
supposed  necessities;  and  of  looking  forward  toward 
last  things,  fruits,  consequences,  facts/'  Modern  psy- 
chology is  essentially  pragmatic  in  its  treatment  of  the 
subject  of  the  mind.  Leaving  to  metaphysics  the  old 
arguments  and  disputes  regarding  the  ultimate  nature 
of  mind,  it  bends  all  its  energies  upon  discovering  the 
laws  of  mental  activities  and  states,  and  developing 
methods  whereby  the  mind  may  be  trained  to  perform 
better  and  more  work,  to  conserve  its  energies,  to  con- 
centrate its  forces.  To  modern  psychology  the  mind  is 
something  to  be  used,  not  merely  something  about 
which  to  speculate  and  theorize.  While  the  metaphy- 
sicians deplore  this  tendency,  the  practical  people  of 
the  world  rejoice. 

Mind  Defined. 

Mind  is  defined  as  "the  faculty  or  power  whereby 
thinking  creatures  feel,  think,  and  will.''  This  defini- 
tiojci -is  inadequate  and  circular  in  nature,  but  this  is 
unavoidable,  for  mind  can  be  defined  only  in  its  own 


8        YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

terms  and  only  by  reference io. its  own  processes.  Mind, 
except  in  reference  to  its  own  activities,  cannot  be  de- 
fined or  conceived.  It  is  known  to  itself  only  through 
its  activities.  Mind  without  mental  states  is  a  mere 
abstraction — a  word  without  a  corresponding  mental 
image  or  concept.  Sir  William  Hamilton  expressed 
the  matter  as  clearly  as  possible,  when  he  said :  "What 
we  mean  by  mind  is  simply  that  which  perceives,  thinks, 
feels,  wjllS;,  a,iid_desires^^^  Without  the  perceiving, 
thinking,  feeling,  willing,  and  desiring,  it  is  impos- 
sible to  form  a  clear  conception  or  mental  image  of 
mind;  deprived  of  its  phenomena  it  becomes  the  merest 
abstraction. 

^Think  About  That  Which  Thinks.^' 

Perhaps  the  simplest  method  of  conveying  the  idea 
of  the  existence  and  nature  of  the  mind  is  that  attrib- 
uted to  a  celebrated  German  teacher  of  psychology  who 
was  wont  to  begin  his  course  by  bidding  his  students 
think  of  something,  his  desk,  for  example.  Then  he 
would  say,  "Now  think  of  that  which  thinks  about  the 
desk/'  Then,  after  a  pause,  he  would  add,  "This  thing 
which  thinks  about  the  desk,  and  about  which  you  are 
now  thinking,  is  the  subject  matter  of  our  study  of 
psychology.^^  The  professor  could  not  have  said  more 
had  he  lectured  for  a  month. 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.        9 

Professor  Gordy  has  well  said  on  this  point:  "The 
mind  must  either  be  that  tvhich  thinks,  feels,  and  wills, 
or  it  must  be  the  thoughts,  feelings,  and  acts  of  will 
of  which  we  are  conscious — mental  facts,  in  one  word. 
But  what  can  we  know  about  that  which  thinks,  feels, 
and  wills,  and  what  can  we  find  out  about  it?  Where 
is  it?  You  will  probably  say,  in  the  brain.  But,  if 
you  are  speaking  literally,  if  you  say  that  it  is  in  the 
brain,  as  a  pencil  is  in  the  pocket,  then  you  must  mean 
that  it  takes  up  room,  that  it  occupies  space,  and  that 
would  make  it  very  much  like  a  material  thing.  In 
truth,  the  more  carefully  you  consider  it,  the  more 
plainly  you  will  see  what  thinking  men  have  known 
for  a  long  time — that  we  do  not  know  and  cannot  learn 
anything  about  the  thing  which  thinks,  and  feels,  and 
wills.  It  is  beyond  the  range  of  human  knowledge. 
The  'books  which  define  psychology  as  the  science  of 
mind  have  not  a  word  to  say  about  that  which  thinks, 
and  feels,  and  wills.  They  are  entirely  taken  up  with 
these  thoughts  and  feelings  and  acts  of  the  v/ill, — 
mental  facts,  in  a  word, — trying  to  tell  us  what  they 
are,  and  to  arrange  them  in  classes,  and  tell  us  the  cir- 
cumstances or  conditions  under  which  they  exist.  It 
seems  to  me  that  it  would  be  better  to  define  psychology 
as  the  science  of  the  experiences,  phenomena,  or  facts  of 
the  mind,  soul,  or  self — of  mental  facts,  in  a  word/' 


10      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT, 

In  view  of  the  facts  of  the  case,  and  following  the 
example  of  the  best  of  the  modern  authorities,  in  this 
book  we  shall  leave  the  consideration  of  the  question 
of  the  ultimate  nature  of  mind  to  the  metaphysicians, 
and  shall  confine  ourselves  to  the  mental  facts,  the  laws 
governing  them,  and  the  best  methods  of  governing 
and  using  them  in  ^^the  business  of  life/^ 

The  classification  and  method  of  development  to  be 
followed  in  this  book  is  as  follows : — 

I.  The  mechanism  of  mental  states,  i.  e,,  the  brain, 
nervous  system,  sense  organs,  etc. 

II.  The  fact  of  Consciousness  and  its  planes. 

III.  Mental  processes  or  faculties,  i.  e.,  (1)  Sensa- 
tion and  Perception;  (2)  Representation,  or  Imagina- 
tion and  Memory;  (3)  Feeling  or  Emotion;  (4) 
Intellect,  or  Reason  and  Understanding;  (5)  Will  or 
Volition. 

Mental  states  depend  upon  the  physical  mechanism 
for  manifestation,  whatever  may  be  the  ultimate  nature 
of  mind.  Mental  states,  whatever  their  special  char- 
acter, will  be  found  to  fit  into  one  of  the  above  five 
general  classes  of  mental  activities. 


CHAPTEK  II 

The  Mechanism  of  Mental  States. 

THE  mechanism  of  mental  states — the  mental 
machinery  by  means  of  which  we  feel,  think, 
and  will — consists  of  the  brain,  nervous  system, 
and  the 'organs  of  sense.  No  matter  what  may  be  the 
real  nature  of  mind, — ^no  matter  what  may  be  the 
theory  held  regarding  its  activities, — it  must  be  ad- 
mitted that  the  mind  is  dependent  upon  this  mechanism 
for  the  manifestation  of  what  we  know  as  mental  states. 
Wonderful  as  is  the  mind,  it  is  seen  to  be  dependent 
upon  this  physical  mechanism  for  the  expression  of  its 
activities.  And  this  dependence  is  not  upon  the  brain 
alone,  but  also  upon  the  entire  nervous  system. 

The  best  authorities  agree  that  the  higher  and  more 
complex  mental  states  are  but  an  evolution  of  simple 
sensation,  and  that  they  are  dependent  upon  sensation 
for  their  raw  material  of  feeling  and  thought.  There- 
fore it  is  proper  that  we  begin  by  a  consideration  of  the 
machinery  of  sensation.  This  necessitates  a  previous 
consideration  of  the  nerves. 

The  Nerves. 

The   body   is   traversed  by   an   intricate   system   of 


12      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

nerves,  which  has  been  likened  to  a  great  telegraph 
system.  The  nerves  transmit  sensations  from  the  vari- 
ous parts  of  thF^dy  to  the  great  receiving  office  of 
the  brain.  They  also  ser^e  to  transmit  the  motor  im- 
pulses from  the  brain  to  4lhii^arious  parts  of  the  body, 
which  impulses  result  in  motion  of  appropriate  parts 
of  the  body.  There  are  also  other  nerves  with  which 
we  have  no  concern  in  this  book,  but  which  perform 
certain  physiological  functions,  such  as  digestion,  secre- 
tion, excretion,  and  circulation.  Our  chief  concern,  at 
this  point,  is  with  the  sensory  nerves. 

The  sensory  nerves  convey  the  impressions  of  the 
outside  world  to  the  brain.  The  brain  is  the  great  cen- 
tral station  of  the  sensory  nerves,  the  latter  having 
countless  sending  stations  in  all  parts  of  the  body,  the 
"wires'^  terminating  in  the  skin.  When  these  nervous 
terminal  stations  are  irritated  or  excited,  they  send  to 
the  brain  messages  calling  for  attention.  This  is  true 
not  only  of  the  nerves  of  touch  or  feeling,  but  also  of 
those  concerned  with  the  respective  senses  of  sight, 
smell,  taste,  and  hearing.  In  fact,  the  best  authorities 
hold  that  all  the  five  senses  are  but  an  evolution  of  the 
primary  sense  of  touch  or  feeling. 

The  Sense  of  Touch. 
The  nerves  of  the  sense  of  touch  have  their  ending 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      13 

in  the  outer  covering  or  skin  of  the  body.  They  report 
contact  with  other  physical  objects.  By  means  of  these 
reports  we  are  aware  not  only  of  coj^t  with  the  out- 
side object^  but  also  of  maliy  facts  concerning  the 
nature  of  that  object;,  a^f^r  instance^  its  degree  of 
hardness,  roughness,  etc.,  an^  its  temperature.  Some 
of  these  nerve  ends  are  very  sensitive,  as,  for  example, 
those  of  the  tip  of  the  tongue  and  finger  ends,  while 
others  are  comparatively  lacking  in  sensitiveness,  as, 
for  illustration,  those  of  the  back.  Certain  of  these  sen- 
sory nerves  confine  themselves  to  reporting  contact  and 
degrees  of  pressure,  while  others  concern  themselves 
solely  with  reporting  the  degrees  of  temperature  of  the 
objects  with  which  their  ends  come  in  contact.  Some 
of  the  latter  respond  to  the  higher  degrees  of  heat, 
while  others  respond  only  to  the  lower  degrees  of  cold. 
The  nerves  of  certain  parts  of  the  body  respond  more 
readily  and  distinctly  to  temperature  than  do  those  of 
other  parts.  To  illustrate,  the  nerves  of  the  cheek  are 
quite  responsive  to  heat  impressions. 

The  Sense  of  Sight. 

The  nerves  of  the  sense  of  sight  terminate  in  the 
complex  optical  apparatus  which  in  popular  terminol- 
ogy is  known  as  ''the  eye.''  What  is  known  as  ''the 
retina''  is   a  very  sensitive  nervous  membrane  which 


14      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

lines  the  inner,  back  part  of  the  eye,  and  in  which  the 
fibers  of  the  optic  nerve  terminate.  The  optical  instru- 
ment of  the  eye  conveys  the  focused  light  vibrations  to 
the  nerves  of  the  retina,  from  which  the  impulse  is 
transmitted  to  the  brain.  .  But,  contrary  to  the  popular 
notion,  the  nerves  of  the  eye  do  not  gauge  distances,  nor 
form  inferences  of  any  kind;  that  is  distinctly  the  work 
of  the  mind.  The  simple  office  of  the  optical  nerves 
consists  in  reporting  color  and  degrees  of  intensity  of 
the  light  waves. 

The  Sense  of  Hearing. 

The  nerves  of  the  sense  of  hearing  terminate  in  the 
inner  part  of  the  ear.  The  tympanum,  or  ^^ear  drum,'' 
receives  the  sound  vibrations  entering  the  cavities  of  the 
ear,  and,  intensifying  and  adapting  them,  it  passes  them 
on  to  the  ends  of  the  auditory  nerve  in  the  internal 
ear,  which  conveys  the  sensation  to  the  brain.  The 
auditory  nerve  reports  to  the  brain  the  degrees  of  pitch, 
intensity,  quality,  and  harmony,  respectively,  of  the 
sound  waves  reaching  the  tympanum.  As  is  well  known, 
there  are  certain  vibrations  of  sound  which  are  too  low 
for  the  auditory  nerve  to  register,  and  others  too  high 
for  it  to  record,  both  classes,  however,  capable  of 
being  recorded  by  scientific  instruments.  It  is  also 
regarded  as  certain  that  some  of  the  lower  animals  are 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      15 

conscious  of  sound  vibrations  which  are  not  registered 
by  the  human  auditory  nerves. 

The  Sense  of  Smell. 

The  nerves  of  the  sense  of  smell  terminate  in  the 
mucous  membrane  of  the  nostrils.  In  order  that  these 
nerves  report  the  odor  of  outside  objects^  actual  contact 
of  minute  particles  of  the  object  with  the  mucous  mem- 
brane of  the  nostrils  is  necessary.  This  is  possible  only 
by  the  passage  through  the  nostrils  of  air  containing 
these  particles;  mere  nearness  to  the  nostril  will  not 
suffice.  These  particles  are  for  the  most  part  composed 
of  tenuous  gases.  Certain  substances  affect  the  olfac- 
tory nerves  much  more  than  do  others,  the  difference 
arising  from  the  chemical  composition  of  the  substance. 
The  olfactory  nerves  convey  the  report  to  the  brain. 

The  Sense  of  Taste. 

The  nerves  of  the  sense  of  taste  terminate  in  the 
tongue,  or  rather  in  the  tiny  cells  of  the  tongue  which 
are  called  ^^taste  buds.^'  Substances  taken  into  the 
mouth  chemically  affect  these  tiny  cells,  and  an  impulse 
is  transmitted  to  the  gustatory  nerves,  which  then  re- 
port the  sensation  to  the  brain.  The  authorities  claim 
that  taste  sensations  may  be  reduced  to  five  general 
classes,  viz.:  sweet,  bitter,  sour,  salty,  and  "hot." 


16      YOUB  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

There  are  certain  nerve  centers  having  important 
offices  in  the  production  and  expression  of  mental  states, 
located  in  the  skull  and  in  the  spinal  column — the 
brain  and  the  spinal  cord — which  we  shall  consider  in 
the  following  chapter. 


CHAPTER  III. 

The  Great  Nerve  Centers. 

THE  great  nerve  centers  which  play  an  important 
part  in  the  production  and  expression  of  men- 
tal states   are  those  of  the  brain  and  spinal 
cord,  respectively. 

The  Spinal  Cord. 

The  spinal  cord  is  that  cord  or  rope  of  nerve  sub- 
stance which  is  inclosed  in  the  spinal  column  or  "back- 
bone/^ It  leaves  the  lower  part  of  the  skull  and  extends 
downward  in  the  interior  of  the  spinal  column  for 
about  eighteen  inches.  It  is  continuous  with  the  brain, 
however,  and  it  is  difficult  to  determine  where  one  begins 
and  the  other  ends.  It  is  composed  of  a  mass  of  gray 
matter  surrounded  by  a  covering  of  white  matter.  From 
the  spinal  cord,  along  its  length,  emerge  thirty-one 
pairs  of  spinal  nerves  which  branch  out  to  each  side  of 
the  body  and  connect  with  the  various  smaller  nerves, 
extending  to  all  parts  of  the  system.  The  spinal 
cord  is  the  great  central  cable  of  the  nervous  tele- 
graphic system,  and  any  injury  to  or  obstruction  of  it 
cripples  or  paralyzes  those  portions  of  the  body  the 


18      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

nerves  of  which  enter  the  spinal  cord  below  the  seat  of 
the  injury  or  obstruction.  Injuries  or  obstructions  of 
this  kind  not  only  inhibit  the  sensory  reports  from  the 
aifected  area^  but  also  inhibit  the  motor  impulses  from 
the  brain  which  are  intended  to  move  the  limbs  or 
parts  of  the  body. 

The  Ganglia  or  ^Tiny  Brains/^ 

What  are  known  as  ganglia,  or  tiny  bunches  of  nerve 
cells,  are  found  in  various  parts  of  the  nervous  system, 
including  the  spinal  nerves.  These  groups  of  nerve 
cells  are  sometimes  called  ^^little  brains/'  and  perform 
quite  important  offices  in  the  mechanism  of  thought  and 
action.  The  spinal  ganglia  receive  sensory  reports,  and 
issue  motor  impulses,  in  many  cases,  without  troubling 
the  central  brain  regarding  the  matter.  These  activi- 
ties are  known  as  "reflex  nervous  action.^' 

Eeflex  Action. 

What  is  known  as  reflex  nervous  action  is  one  of  the 
most  wonderful  of  the  activities  of  the  nervous  and 
mental  mechanism,  and  the  knowledge  thereof  usually 
comes  as  a  surprise  to  the  average  person,  for  he  is 
generally  under  the  impression  that  these  activities 
are  possible  only  to  the  central  brain.  It  is  a  fact  that 
not  only  is  the  central  brain  really  a  trinity  of  three 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      19 

brains,  but  that,  in  addition  to  these,  every  one  has  a 
great  number  of  ^^little  brains''  distributed  over  his 
nervous  system,  any  and  all  of  which  are  capable  of 
receiving  sensory  reports  and  also  of  sending  forth 
motor  impulses.  It  is  quite  worth  while  for  one  to 
become  acquainted  with  this  wonderful  form  of  neuro- 
mental  activity. 

A  cinder  enters  the  eye,  the  report  reaches  a  gan- 
glion, a  motor  impulse  is  sent  forth,  and  the  eyelid 
closes.  The  same  result  ensues  if  an  object  approaches 
the  eye  but  without  actually  entering  it.  In  either 
case  the  person  is  not  conscious  of  the  sensation  and 
motor  impulse  until  the  latter  has  been  accomplished. 
This  is  reflex  action.  The  instinctive  movement  of  the 
tickled  foot  is  another  instance.  The  jerking  away  of 
the  hand  burnt  by  the  lighted  end  of  the  cigar,  or 
pricked  by  the  point  of  the  pin,  is  another  instance. 
The  involuntary  activities,  and  those  known  as  uncon- 
scious activities,  result  from  reflex  action. 

More  than  this,  it  is  a  fact  that  many  activities 
originally  voluntary  become  what  is  known  as  ^^ac- 
quired  reflexes,''  or  ^^^motor  habits,"  by  means  of  certain 
nervous  centers  acquiring  the  habit  of  sending  forth 
certain  motor  impulses  in  response  to  certain  sensory 
reports.  The  familiar  movements  of  our  lives  are 
largely  performed  in  this  way,  as,  for  instance,  walk-^ 


20      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

ing,  using  knife  and  fork,  operating  typewriters,  ma- 
chines of  all  kinds,  writing,  etc.  The  squirming  of  a 
decapitated  snake,  the  muscular  movements  of  a  de- 
capitated frog,  and  the  violent  struggles,  fluttering, 
and  leaps  of  the  decapitated  fowl,  are  instances  of 
reflex  action.  Medical  reports  indicate  that  in  cases 
of  decapitation  even  man  may  manifest  similar  reflex 
action  in  some  cases.  Thus  we  may  see  that  we  may 
feel  and  will  by  means  of  our  ^^little  brains'^  as  well 
as  by  the  central  brain  or  brains.  Whatever  mind  may 
be,  it  is  certain  that  in  these  processes  it  employs  other 
portions  of  the  nervous  system  than  the  central  brain. 

The  Three  Brains. 

What  is  known  as  the  brain  of  man  is  really  a  trinity 
of  three  brains,  known  respectively  as  (1)  the  medulla 
oblongata,  (2)  the  cerebellum,  and  (3)  the  cerebrum. 
If  one  wishes  to  limit  the  mental  activity  to  conscious 
intellectual  effort,  then  and  then  only  is  he  correct  in 
considering  the  cerebrum  or  large  brain  as  ^^the  brain.^^ 

The  Medulla  Oblongata. — The  medulla  oblongata  is 
an  enlargement  of  the  spinal  cord  at  the  base  of  the 
brain.  Its  office  is  that  of  controlling  the  involuntary 
activities  of  the  body,  such  as  respiration,  circulation, 
assimilation,  etc.  In  a  broad  sense,  its  activities  may 
be  said  to  be  of  the  nature  of  highly  developed  and  com- 


YOVB  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      21 

plex  reflex  activities.  It  manifests  chiefly  through  the 
sympathetic  nervous  system  which  controls  the  vital 
functions.  It  does  not  need  to  call  on  the  large  brain 
in  these  matters,  ordinarily,  and  is  able  to  perform  its 
tasks  without  the  plane  of  ordinary  consciousness. 

The  Cerebellum, — The  cerebellum,  also  known  as 
"the  little  brain/'  lies  just  above  the  medulla  oblon- 
gata, and  just  below  the  rear  portion  of  the  cerebrum 
or  great  brain.  It  combines  the  nature  of  a  purely 
reflex  center  on  the  one  hand,  with  that  of  "habit 
mind''  on  the  other.  In  short,  it  fills  a  place  between 
the  activities  of  the  cerebrum  and  the  medulla  oblon- 
gata, having  some  of  the  characteristics  of  each.  It  is 
the  organ  of  a  number  of  important  acquired  reflexes, 
such  as  walking,  and  many  other  familiar  muscular 
movements,  which  have  first  been  consciously  acquired 
and  then  become  habitual.  The  skilled  skater,  bicy- 
clist, typist,  or  machinist  depends  upon  the  cerebellum 
for  the  ease  and  certainty  with  which  he  performs  his 
movements  "without  thinking  of  them."  One  may  be 
said  never  to  have  thoroughly  acquired  a  set  of  mus- 
cular movements  such  as  we  have  mentioned,  until  the 
cerebellum  has  taken  over  the  task  and  relieved  the 
cerebrum  of  the  conscious  effort.  One's  technique  is 
never  perfected  until  the  cerebellum  assumes  control 
and  direction  of  the  necessary  movements  and  the  im- 


23      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

pulses  are  sent  forth  from  below  the  plane  of  ordinary 
consciousness. 

The  Cerebrum. — The  cerebrum,  or  '^great  brain'^ 
(which  is  regarded  as  ^^the  brain^'  by  the  average  per- 
son), is  situated  in  the  upper  portion  of  the  skull,  and 
occupies  by  far  the  larger  portion  of  the  cavity  of  the 
skull.  It  is  divided  into  two  great  divisions  or  hemi- 
spheres. The  best  of  the  modern  authorities  are  agreed 
that  the  cerebrum  has  zones  or  areas  of  specialized 
functioning,  some  of  which  receive  the  sensory  reports 
of  the  nerves  and  organs  of  sense,  while  others  send 
forth  the  motor  impulses  which  result  in  voluntary 
physical  action.  Many  of  these  areas  or  zones  have 
been  located  by  science,  while  others  remain  as  yet 
unlocated.  The  probability  is  that  in  time  science  will 
succeed  in  correctly  locating  the  area  or  zone  of  each 
and  every  class  of  sensation  and  motor  impulse. 

The  Cortex. 

The  area  of  thought,  memory,  and  imagination  has 
not  been  clearly  located,  except  that  these  mental  states 
are  believed  to  have  their  seat  in  the  cortex  or  outer 
thin  rind  of*  gray  brain  matter  which  envelopes  and  cov- 
ers the  mass  of  brain  substance.  It  is,  moreover,  consid- 
ered probable  that  the  higher  processes  of  reasoning  are 
performed  in  or  by  the  cortex  of  the  frontal  lobes.     The 


YOVR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      23 

cortex  of  a  person  of  average  intelligence,  if  spread  out 
on  a  flat  surface,  measures  about  four  square  feet.  The 
higher  the  degree  of  intelligence  possessed  by  a  lower 
animal  or  human  being,  as  a  rule,  the  deeper  and  more 
numerous  are  the  folds  or  convolutions  of  the  cortex, 
and  the  finer  its  structure.  It  may  be  stated  as  a 
general  rule,  with  but  very  few  exceptions,  that  the 
higher  the  degree  of  intelligence  in  a  lower  animal  or 
human  being,  the  greater  is  the  area  of  its  cortex  in 
proportion  to  the  size  of  the  brain.  The  cortex,  it  must 
be  remembered,  is  folded  into  deep  furrows  or  con- 
volutions, the  brain  in  shape,  divisions,  and  convolu- 
tions resembling  the  inner  portion  of  an  English  walnut. 
The  interior  of  the  two  hemispheres  of  the  cerebrum 
is  composed  largely  of  connective  nerves  which  doubt- 
less serve  to  produce  and  maintain  the  unity  of  func- 
tion of  the  mental  processes. 

While  physiological  psychology  has  performed  great 
work  in  discovering  brain-centers  and  explaining  much 
of  the  mechanism  of  mental  processes,  it  has  but 
touched  the  most  elementary  and  simple  of  the  men- 
tal processes.  The  higher  processes  have  so  far  defied 
analysis  or  explanation  in  the  terms  of  physiology. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

Consciousness. 

THE  fact  of  consciousness  is  the  great  mystery 
of  psychology.  It  is  difficult  even  to  define 
the  term,  although  every  person  of  average  in- 
telligence understands  what  is  sought  to  be  conveyed 
by  it.  Webster  defines  it  as  ^^knowledge  of  one^s  own 
existence,  sensations,  mental  operations,  etc. ;  immediate 
knowledge  or  perception  of  any  object,  state,  or  sensa- 
tion; being  aware;  being  sensible  of/^  Another  author- 
ity defines  the  term  as  "the  state  of  being  aware  of 
one^s  sensations;  the  power,  faculty,  or  mental  state  of 
being  aware  of  one's  own  existence,  condition  at  the 
moment,  thoughts,  feelings,  and  actions/'  Halleck's 
definition  is :  "That  indefinable  characteristic  of  mental 
states  which  causes  us  to  be  aware  of  them.'' 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  idea  of  "awareness"  is  the 
essence  of  the  idea  of  consciousness.  But,  at  the  last, 
we  are  compelled  to  acknowledge  that  it  is  impossible 
to  closely  define  consciousness,  for  it  is  something  so 
entirely  unique  and  different  from  anything  else  that 
we  have  no  other  terms  at  all  synonymous  to  it.  We 
can  define  it  only  in  its  own  terms,  as  will  be  seen  by 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      25 

reference  to  the  definitions  above  given.  And  it  is 
equally  impossible  to  clearly  account  for  its  appearance 
and  being.  Huxley  has  well  said:  "How  it  is  that 
anything  so  remarkable  as  a  state  of  consciousness  comes 
about  by  the  result  of  irritating  nervous  tissue,  is  just 
as  unaccountable  as  the  appearance  of  the  jinnee  when 
Aladdin  rubbed  his  lamp.^^  All  that  we  can  ever  know 
regarding  the  nature  of  consciousness  must  be  learned 
from  turning  the  consciousness  in  ourselves  back  upon 
itself — by  focusing  consciousness  upon  its  own  mental 
operations  by  means  of  introspection.  By  turning  in- 
ward the  conscious  gaze  we  may  perceive  the  flow  of 
the  stream  of  thought  from  its  rise  from  the  subcon- 
scious regions  of  the  mind  to  its  final  disappearance  in 
the  same  region. 

It  is  a  common  error  to  suppose  that  we  are  directly 
conscious  of  objects  outside  of  ourselves.  This  is  im- 
possible, for  there  is  no  direct  knowledge  of  such  out- 
side objects.  We  are  conscious  merely  of  our  sensations 
of,  or  mental  images  of,  the  outside  objects.  All  that 
it  is  possible  for  us  to  be  directly  conscious  of  are  our 
own  mental  experiences  or  states.  We  cannot  be  di- 
rectly conscious  of  anything  outside  of  our  own  minds. 
We  are  not  directly  conscious  of  the  tree  which  we  see; 
we  are  directly  conscious  merely  of  the  sensation  of  the 
nerves  arising  from  the  impact  of  the  light  waves  car- 


26      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

vying  the  image  of  the  tree.  We  are  not  directly  con- 
scious of  the  tree  when  we  touch  it  and  perceive  its 
character  in  that  way;  we  are  directly  conscious  merely 
of  the  sensation  reported  by  the  nerves  in  the  finger 
tips  which  have  come  in  contact  with  the  tree.  We  are 
directly  conscious  even  of  our  own  bodies  only  in  the 
same  way.  It  is  necessary  for  the  mind  to  experience 
that  of  which  it  may  become  conscious.  We  are  con- 
scious only  of  (1)  that  which  our  mind  is  experiencing 
at  this  moment,  or  (2)  that  which  it  has  experienced 
in  the  past,  and  which  is  being  re-experienced  this  mo- 
ment by  the  process  of  the  memory,  or  which  is  being 
re-combined  or  re-arranged  this  moment  by  the  imag- 
ination. 

Subconscious  Planes. 

But  it  must  not  be  thought  that  every  mental  state 
or  mental  fact  is  in  the  field  of  consciousness.  This 
error  has  been  exploded  for  many  years.  The  fact  is 
now  recognized  that  the  field  of  consciousness  is  a  very 
narrow  and  limited  one,  and  that  the  great  field  of 
mental  activity  lies  outside  of  its  narrow  limits.  Be- 
yond and  outside  of  the  narrow  field  of  consciousness 
lies  the  great  subconscious  storehouse  of  memory  in 
which  are  stored  the  experiences  of  the  past,  to  be 
drawn  again  into  the  field  of  consciousness  by  an  effort 
of  the  will  in  the  act  of  recollection,  or  by  association 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      27 

in  ordinary  remembrance.  In  that  great  region,  also, 
the  mind  manifests  many  of  its  activities  and  performs 
much  of  its  work.  In  that  great  region  are  evolved 
the  emotions  and  feelings  which  play  such  an  impor- 
tant part  in  our  lives,  and  which  often  manifest  a  vague 
disturbing  unrest  long  before  they  rise  to  the  plane  of 
consciousness.  In  that  great  region  are  produced  the 
ideas,  feelings,  and  conceptions  which  arise  to  the  plane 
of  consciousness  and  manifest  that  which  men  call 
^^genius.^^ 

On  the  subconscious  plane  the  imagination  does  much 
of  its  work,  and  startles  its  owner  by  presenting  him 
with  the  accomplished  result  in  the  field  of  conscious- 
ness. In  the  subconscious  field  is  performed  that  pe- 
culiar process  of  mental  mastication,  digestion,  and 
assimilation  with  which  all  brain  workers  are  familiar, 
and  which  absorbs  the  raw  mental  material  given  it, 
separates,  digests,  and  assimilates  it,  and  re-presents 
it  to  the  conscious  faculties  sometime  after  as  a  trans- 
formed substance.  It  has  been  estimated  that  at  least 
eighty-five  per  cent,  of  our  mental  activities  are  per- 
formed below  or  outside  of  the  field  of  consciousness. 
The  psychology  of  to-day  is  paying  much  attention  to 
this  formerly  neglected  great  area  or  areas  of  the  mind. 
The  psychology  of  to-morrow  will  pay  still  greater  at- 
tention to  it. 


28      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

The  best  of  the  modern  authorities  agree  that  in  the 
great  field  of  subconscious  mentation  is  to  be  found  the 
explanation  of  much  that  is  unexplainable  otherwise. 
In  fact,  it  is  probable  that  before  long  consciousness 
will  be  regarded  as  a  mere  focusing  of  attention  upon 
mental  states,  and  the  objects  of  consciousness  merely 
as  that  portion  of  the  contents  of  the  mind  in  the  field 
of  mental  vision  created  by  such  focusing. 


^0463 


CHAPTER  V. 
Attention. 

INTIMATELY  connected  with  the  object  of  con- 
sciousness is  that  process  of  the  mind  which  we 
call  ^^attention/^  Attention  is  generally  defined 
as  ^'the  application  of  the  mind  to  a  mental  state/^  It 
is  often  referred  to  as  ^^concentrated  consciousness/' 
but  others  have  ventured  the  somewhat  daring  con- 
jecture that  consciousness  itself  is  rather  the  result  of 
attention,  instead  of  the  latter  being  an  incident  of 
consciousness.  We  shall  not  attempt  to  discuss  this 
question  here,  except  to  state  that  consciousness  depends 
very  materially  upon  the  degree  of  attention  bestowed 
upon  its  object.  The  authorities  place  great  impor- 
tance upon  the  intelligent  direction  of  the  attention, 
and  hold  that  without  this  the  higher  forms  of  knowl- 
edge are  impossible. 

It  is  the  common  belief  that  we  feel,  see,  hear,  taste, 
or  smell  whenever  objects  affecting  those  senses  come 
in  contact  with  the  organs  of  sense  governing  them. 
But  this  is  only  a  partial  truth.  The  real  truth  is 
that  we  become  conscious  of  the  report  of  these  senses 
only  when  the  attention  is  directed  toward  the  sensa- 
tion, voluntarily  or  involuntarily.     That  is  to  say,  that 


30      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

in  many  cases  although  the  sense  nerves  and  organs 
report  a  disturbance,  the  mind  does  not  become  con- 
sciously aware  of  the  report  unless  the  attention  is 
directed  toward  it  either  by  an  act  of  will  or  else  by 
reflex  action.  For  instance,  the  clock  may  strike  loudly, 
and  yet  we  may  not  be  conscious  of  the  fact,  for  we  are 
concentrating  our  attention  upon  a  book;  or  we  may 
eat  the  choicest  food  without  tasting  it,  for  we  are 
listening  intently  to  the  conversation  of  our  charming 
neighbor.  We  may  fail  to  perceive  some  startling  oc- 
currence happening  under  our  very  eyes,  for  we  are 
buried  in  deep  thought  concerning  something  far  re- 
moved from  the  present  scene.  There  are  many  cases 
on  record  showing  that  one  may  be  so  interested  in 
speaking,  thinking,  or  acting  that  he  will  not  experi- 
ence pain  that  would  otherwise  be  intolerable.  Writers 
have  forgotten  their  pain  in  the  concentrated  interest 
bestowed  upon  their  work;  mothers  have  failed  to  feel 
pain  when  their  infants  required  urgent  attention; 
orators  have  been  so  carried  away  by  their  own  elo- 
quence that  they  have  failed  to  feel  the  pricking  of 
the  pin  by  means  of  which  their  friends  have  sought 
to  attract  their  attention.  Not  only  perception  and 
feeling  depend  largely  upon  attention,  but  the  proc- 
esses of  reasoning,  memory,  and  even  of  will,  depend 
upon  attention  for  much  of  their  manifestation. 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      31 

Psychologists  divide  attention  into  two  general 
classes,  viz.:  (1)  voluntary  attention  and  (2)  involun- 
tary attention. 

Voluntary  attention  is  attention  directed  by  the  will 
to  some  object  of  our  own  more  or  less  deliberate  selec- 
tion. It  requires  a  distinct  effort  of  the  will  in  order 
to  focus  the  attention  in  this  way,  and  many  persons 
are  scarcely  aware  of  its  existence,  so  seldom  do  they 
manifest  it.  Voluntary  attention  is  the  result  of  train- 
ing and  practice,  and  marks  the  man  of  strong  will, 
concentration,  and  character.  Some  authorities  go  so 
far  as  to  say  that  much  of  that  which  is  commonly 
called  ^Vill  power'^  is  really  but  a  developed  form  of 
voluntary  attention,  the  man  of  ^^strong  will"  holding 
before  him  the  one  idea  which  he  wishes  to  realize. 

Involuntary  attention,  often  called  ^^reflex  attention," 
is  attention  called  forth  by  a  nervous  response  to  some 
sense  stimulus.  This  is  the  common  form  of  attention, 
and  is  but  the  same  form  which  is  so  strongly  mani- 
fested by  children  whose  attention  is  caught  by  every 
new  object,  but  which  cannot  be  held  for  any  length  of 
time  by  a  familiar  or  uninteresting  one. 

It  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that  one  should  cul- 
tivate his  power  of  voluntary  attention.  Not  only  is 
the  will  power  strengthened  and  developed  in  this  way, 
but  every  mental  faculty  is  developed  by  reason  thereof. 


32      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

The  training  of  the  voluntary  attention  is  the  first  step 
in  mental  development. 

Training  the  Attention. 

That  the  voluntary  attention  may  be  deliberately 
trained  and  developed  is  a  fact  which  many  of  the 
world^s  greatest  men  have  proved  for  themselves.  There 
is  only  one  way  to  train  and  develop  any  mental  power 
of  faculty — and  that  is  hy  practice  and  use.  By  prac- 
tice, interest  may  be  given  to  objects  previously  unin- 
teresting, and  thus  the  use  of  the  attention  develops 
the  interest  which  further  holds  it.  Interest  is  the 
natural  road  over  which  attention  travels  easily,  but 
interest  itself  may  be  induced  by  concentrated  attention. 
By  studying  and  examining  an  object,  the  attention 
brings  to  light  many  new  and  novel  features  regarding 
the  thing,  and  these  produce  a  new  interest  which  in 
turn  attracts  further  and  continued  attention. 

There  is  no  royal  road  to  the  development  of  volun- 
tary attention.  The  only  true  method  is  work,  prac- 
tice, and  use.  You  must  practice  on  uninteresting 
things,  the  primary  interest  being  your  desire  to  develop 
the  power  of  voluntary  attention.  But  as  you  begin 
to  attend  to  the  uninteresting  thing  you  will  become 
interested  in  the  task  for  its  own  sake.  Take  some 
object  and  "place  your  mind  upon  it."     Think  of  its 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      33 

nature,  where  it  came  from,  its  use,  its  associations,  its 
probable  future,  of  things  related  to  it,  etc.,  etc.  Keep 
the  attention  firmly  upon  it,  and  shut  out  all  outside 
ideas.  Then,  after  a  little  practice  of  this  kind,  lay- 
aside  the  object  for  the  time  being,  and  take  it  up 
again  the  next  day,  endeavoring  to  discover  new  points 
of  interest  in  it.  The  main  thing  to  be  sought  is  to 
hold  the  thing  in  your  mind,  and  this  can  be  done  only 
by  discovering  features  of  interest  in  it.  The  interest- 
loving  attention  may  rebel  at  this  task  at  first,  and  will 
seek  to  wander  from  the  path  into  the  green  pastures 
which  are  found  on  each  side  thereof.  But  you  must 
bring  the  mind  back  to  the  task,  again  and  again. 

After  a  time  the  mind  will  become  accustomed  to  the 
drill,  and  will  even  begin  to  enjoy  it.  Give  it  some 
variety  by  occasionally  changing  the  objects  of  exam- 
ination. The  object  need  not  always  be  something  to 
be  looked  at.  Instead,  select  some  subject  in  history 
or  literature,  and  "run  it  down,^'  endeavoring  to  bring 
to  light  all  the  facts  relating  to  it  that  are  possible  to 
you.  Anything  may  be  used  as  the  subject  or  object 
of  your  inquiry;  but  what  is  chosen  must  be  held  in 
the  field  of  conscious  attention  firmly  and  fixedly.  The 
habit  once  acquired,  you  will  find  the  practice  most 
fascinating.  You  will  invent  new  subjects  or  objects 
of  inquiry,  investigation,  and  thought,  which  in  them- 


34      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

selves  will  well  repay  you  for  your  work  and  time. 
But  never  lose  sight  of  the  main  point — the  develop- 
ment of  the  power  of  voluntary  attention. 

In  studying  the  methods  of  developing  and  training 
the  voluntary  attention,  the  student  should  remember 
that  any  exercise  which  develops  the  will,  will  result  in 
developing  the  attention;  and,  likewise,  any  exercise 
which  develops  the  voluntary  attention  will  tend  to 
strengthen  the  will.  The  will  and  attention  are  bo 
closely  bound  together  that  what  affects  one  also  influ- 
ences the  other.  This  fact  should  be  borne  in  mind, 
and  the  exercises  and  practices  based  upon  it. 

In  practicing  concentration  of  voluntary  attention,  it 
should  be  remembered  that  concentrating  consists  not 
only  of  focusing  the  attention  upon  a  given  object  or 
subject,  but  also  of  the  shutting  out  of  impressions  from 
other  objects  or  subjects.  Some  authorities  advise  that 
the  student  endeavor  to  listen  to  one  voice  among  many, 
or  one  instrument  among  the  many  of  a  band  or  orches- 
tra. Others  advise  the  practice  of  concentrating  on  the 
reading  of  a  book  in  a  room  filled  by  persons  engaged 
in  conversation,  and  similar  exercises.  Whatever  aids 
in  narrowing  the  circle  of  attention  at  a  given  moment 
tends  to  develop  the  power  of  voluntary  attention. 

The  study  of  mathematics  and  logic  is  also  held  to  be 
an  excellent  practice  in  concentration  of  voluntary  at- 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      35 

tention,  inasmuch  as  these  studies  require  close  con- 
centration and  attention.  Attention  is  also  developed 
by  «Tiy  Rf^TijyjYi— QT^^  whiVh  flpTnaTirlR  anahj.^is  nf  a 
whole  into  its  parts^  and  then  the  synthesis  or  building 
up  of  a  whole  from  its  scattered  parts.  Each  of  the 
senses  should  play  a  part  in  the  exercises,  and  in  addi- 
tion to  this  the  mind  should  be  trained  to  concentrate 
upon  some  one  idea  held  within  itself — some  mental 
image  or  abstract  idea  existing  independently  of  any  ob- 
ject of  immediate  sense  report. 


CHAPTER  VI. 
Perception. 

IT  is  a  common  mistake  that  we  perceive  everything 
that  is  reported  to  the  mind  by  the  senses.  As 
a  matter  of  fact  we  perceive  but  a  very  small 
portion  of  the  reports  of  the  senses.  There  are  thou- 
sands of  sights  reported  by  our  eyes,  sounds  reported 
by  our  ears,  smells  reported  by  our  nostrils,  and  eon- 
tacts  reported  by  our  nerves  of  touch,  every  day  of  our 
lives,  but  which  are  not  perceived  or  observed  by  the 
mind.  We  perceive  and  observe  only  when  the  atten- 
tion, reflex  or  voluntary,  is  directed  to  the  report  of 
the  senses,  and  when  the  mind  interprets  the  report. 
While  perception  depends  upon  the  reports  of  the  senses 
for  its  raw  material,  it  depends  entirely  upon  the  ap- 
plication of  the  mind  for  its  complete  manifestation. 

The  student  usually  experiences  great  difficulty  in 
distinguishing  between  sensation  and  perception.  A 
sensation  is  a  simple  report  of  the  senses,  which  is 
received  in  consciousness.  Perception  is  the  thought 
arising  from  the  feeling  of  the  sensation.  Perception 
usually  combines  several  sensations  into  one  thought  or 
percept.     By  sensation  the  mind  feels;  by  perception 


YOUB  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      37 

it  knows  that  it  feels,  and  recognizes  the  object  causing 
the  sensation.  Sensation  merely  brings  a  report  from 
outside  objects,  while  perception  identifies  the  report 
with  the  object  which  caused  it.  Perception  inievprets 
the  reports  of  sensation.  Sensation  reports  a  flash  of 
light,  from  above;  perception  interprets  the  light  as 
starlight,  or  moonlight,  or  sunlight,  or  as  the  flash  of  a 
meteor.  Sensation  reports  a  sharp,  pricking,  painful 
contact;  perception  interprets  it  as  the  prick  of  a  pin. 
Sensation  reports  a  red  spot  on  a  green  background; 
perception  interprets  it  as  a  berry  on  a  bush. 

Moreover,  while  we  may  perceive  a  simple  single 
sensation,  our  perceptions  are  usually  of  a  group  of  sen- 
sations. Perception  is  usually  employed  in  grouping 
sensations  and  identifying  them  with  the  object  or  ob- 
jects causing  them.  In  its  identification  it  draws  upon 
whatever  memory  of  past  experiences  the  mind  may 
possess.  Memory,  imagination,  feeling,  and  thought 
are  called  into  play,  to  some  extent,  in  every  clear  per- 
ception. The  infant  has  but  feeble  perception,  but  as 
it  gains  experience  it  begins  to  manifest  perceptions 
and  form  percepts.  Sensations  resemble  the  letters  of 
the  alphabet,  and  perception  the  forming  of  words  and 
sentences  from  the  letters.  Thus  c,  a,  and  t  symbolize 
sensations,  while  the  word  ^^cat,''  formed  from  them, 
symbolizes  the  perception  of  the  object 


38      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

It  is  held  that  all  knowledge  begins  with  sensation; 
that  the  mental  history  of  the  race  or  individual  begins 
with  its  first  sensation.  But,  while  this  is  admitted,  it 
must  be  remembered  that  sensation  simply  provides  the 
simple,  elementary,  raw  material  of  thought.  The  first 
process  of  actual  thought,  or  knowledge,  begins  with 
perception.  From  our  percepts  all  of  our  higher  con- 
cepts and  ideas  are  formed.  Perception  depends  upon 
association  of  the  sensation  with  other  sensations  pre- 
viously experienced;  it  is  based  upon  experience.  The 
greater  the  experience,  the  greater  is  the  possibility  of 
perception,  all  else  being  equal. 

When  perception  begins,  the  mind  loses  sight  of  the 
sensation  in  itself,  for  it  identifies  it  as  a  quality  of  the 
thing  producing  it.  The  sensation  of  light  is  thought 
of  as  a  quality  of  the  star;  the  pricking  sensation  is 
thought  of  as  a  quality  of  the  pin  or  chestnut  bur; 
the  sensation  of  odor  is  thought  of  as  a  quality  of  the 
rose.  In  the  case  of  the  rose,  the  several  sensations  of 
sight,  touch,  and  smell,  in  their  impression  of  the  quali- 
ties of  color,  shape,  softness,  and  perfume,  are  grouped 
together  in  the  percept  of  the  complete  object  of  the 
flower. 

A  percept  is  ^^that  which  is  perceived;  the  object  of 
the  act  of  perception.^'  The  percept,  of  course,  is  a 
mental  state  corresponding  with  its  outside  object.     It 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT,      39 

is  a  combination  of  several  sensations  which  are  re- 
garded as  the  qualities  of  the  outside  object,  to  which 
are  combined  the  memories  of  past  experiences,  ideas, 
feelings,  and  thoughts.  A  percept,  then,  while  the 
simplest  form  of  thought,  is  seen  to  be  a  mental  state. 
The  formation  of  a  percept  consists  of  three  gradual 
stages,  viz.:  (1)  The  attention  forms  definite  con- 
scious sensations  from  indefinite  nervous  reports;  (2) 
the  mind  interprets  these  definite  conscious  sensations 
and  attributes  them  to  the  outside  object  causing  them; 
(3)  the  related  sensations  are  grouped  together,  their 
unity  perceived,  and  they  are  regarded  as  qualities  of 
the  outside  object. 

The  plain  distinction  between  a  sensation  and  a  per- 
cept may  be  fixed  in  the  mind  by  remembering  the 
following:  A  sensation  is  a  feeling;  a  percept  is  a 
simple  thought  identifying  one  or  more  sensations.  A 
sensation  is  merely  the  conscious  recognition  of  an 
excitation  of  a  nerve  end;  a  percept  resulta-fxcm  a 
distinct  mental  process  regarding  the  sensation. 

Developing  Perception. 

It  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that  we  develop  and 
train  our  powers  of  perception.  For  our  education  de- 
pends very  materially  upon  our  perceptive  power.  What 
matters  it  to  us  if  the  outside  world  be  filled  with 


40      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

manifold  objects,  if  we  do  not  perceive  them  to  exist! 
Upon  perception  depends  the  material  of  our  mental 
world.  Many  persons  go  through  the  world  without 
perceiving  even  the  most  obvious  facts.  Their  eyes 
and  ears  are  perfect  instruments,  their  nerves  convey 
accurate  reports,  but  the  perceptive  faculties  of  the 
mind  fail  to  observe  and  interpret  the  report  of  the 
senses.  They  see  and  hear  distinctly,  but  the  reports  of 
the  senses  are  not  observed  or  noted  by  them;  they 
mean  nothing  to  them.  One  may  see  many  things,  and 
yet  observe  but  few.  clit  j.s  not  upon  what  we  see  or 
hear  that  our  stock  of  knowledge  depends,,  so-much  as 
it  does  upon  what  we  perceive,  notice,  or  observe. 

Not  only  is  one's  stock  of  practical  knowledge  largely 
based  upon  developed  perception,  but  one's  success  also 
depends  materially  upon  the  same  faculties.  In  busi- 
ness and  professional  life  the  successful  man  is  usually 
he  who  has  developed  perceptive  powers;  he  who  has 
learned  to  perceive,  observe,  and  note.  The  man  who 
perceives  and  takes  mental  notes  of  what  occurs  in  his 
world  is  the  man  who  is  apt  to  know  things  when  such 
knowledge  is  needed.  In  this  age  of  ^^book  education'^ 
we  find  that  the  young  people  are  not  nearly  so  observ- 
ant as  are  those  children  who  had  to  depend  upon  the 
powers  of  perception  for  their  knowledge.  The  young 
Arab  or  Indian  will  observe  more  in  an  hour  than  the 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      41 

civilized  child  will  in  a  day.  To  live  in  a  world  of 
books  tends,  in  many  cases,  to  weaken  the  powers  of 
observation  and  perception. 

Perception  may  be  developed  by  practice.  Begin  by 
taking  notice  of  the  things  seen  and  heard  in  your 
usual  walks.  Keep  wide  open  the  eyes  of  the  mind. 
Notice  the  faces  of  people,  their  walk,  their  character- 
istics. Look  for  interesting  and  odd  things,  and  you 
will  see  them.  Do  not  go  through  life  in  a  daydream, 
but  keep  a  sharp  lookout  for  things  of  interest  and 
value.  The  most  familiar  things  will  repay  you  for 
the  time  and  work  of  examining  them  in  detail,  and 
the  practice  gained  by  such  tasks  will  prove  valuable 
in  your  development  of  perception. 

An  authority  remarks  that  very  few  persons,  even 
those  living  in  the  country,  know  whether  a  cow's  ears 
are  above,  below,  behind,  or  in  front  of  her  horns;  nor 
whether  cats  descend  trees  head  first  or  tail  first.  Very 
few  persons  can  distinguish  between  the  leaves  of  the 
various  kinds  of  familiar  trees  in  their  neighborhood. 
Comparatively  few  persons  are  able  to  describe  the 
house  in  which  they  live,  at  least  beyond  the  most 
general  features — the  details  are  unknown. 

Houdin,  the  French  conjurer,  was  able  to  pass  by  a 
shop  window  and  perceive  every  article  in  it,  and  then 
repeat  what  he  had  seen.     But  he  acquired  this  skill 


43       YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

only  by  constant  and  gradual  practice.  He  himself 
decried  his  skill  and  claimed  that  it  was  as  nothing 
compared  to  that  of  the  fashionable  woman  who  can 
pass  another  woman  on  the  street  and  ^Hake  in"  her 
entire  attire,  from  head  to  foot,  at  one  glance,  and  "be 
able  to  describe  not  only  the  fashion  and  quality  of  the 
stuffs,  but  also  say  if  the  lace  be  real  or  only  machine 
made/^  A  former  president  of  Yale  is  said  to  have 
been  able  to  glance  at  a  book  and  read  a  quarter  of  a 
page  at  one  time. 

Any  study  or  occupation  which  requires  analysis  will 
develop  the  power  of  perception.  Consequently,  if  we 
will  analyze  the  things  we  see,  resolving  them  into  their 
parts  or  elements,  we  will  likewise  develop  the  percep- 
tive faculties.  It  is  a  good  exercise  to  examine  some 
small  object  and  endeavor  to  discover  as  many  separate 
points  of  perception  as  possible,  noting  them  on  a  sheet 
of  paper.  The  most  familiar  object,  if  carefully  exam- 
ined, will  yield  rich  returns. 

If  two  persons  will  enter  into  a  contest  of  this  kind, 
the  spirit  of  rivalry  and  competition  will  quicken  the 
powers  of  observation.  Those  who  have  had  the  pa- 
tience and  perseverance  to  systematically  practice  exer- 
cises of  this  kind,  report  that  they  notice  a  steady 
improvement  from  the  very  start.  But  even  if  one 
does  not  feel  inclined  to  practice  in  this  way,  it  will 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT,      43 

be  found  possible  to  begin  to  take  notice  of  the  details 
of  things  one  sees,  the  expression  of  persons^  faces,  the 
details  of  their  dress,  their  tone  of  voice,  the  quality 
of  the  goods  we  handle,  and  the  little  things  especially. 
Perception,  like  attention,  follows  interest;  but,  like- 
wise, interest  may  be  created  in  things  by  observing 
their  details,  peculiarities,  and  characteristics. 

The  best  knowledge  gained  by  one  is  that  resulting 
from  his  own  personal  perception.  There  is  a  nearness 
and  trueness  about  that  which  one  knows  in  this  way 
which  is  lacking  in  that  which  he  merely  believes  be- 
cause he  has  read  or  heard  it.  One  can  make  such 
knowledge  a  part  of  himself.  Not  only  is  one's  knowl- 
edge dependent  upon  what  he  perceives,  but  his  very 
character  also  results  from  the  character  of  his  percepts. 
The  influence  of  environment  is  great — and  what  is 
environment  but  things  perceived  about  one?  It  is  not 
so  much  what  lies  outside  of  one,  as  what  part  of  it 
gets  inside  of  one  by  perception.  By  directing  his  at- 
tention to  desirable  objects,  and  perceiving  as  much  of 
them  as  is  possible,  one  really  builds  his  own  character 
at  will. 

The  world  needs  good  ^^perceivers''  in  all  the  walks 
of  life.  It  finds  a  shortage  of  them,  and  is  demanding 
them  loudly,  being  willing  to  pay  a  good  price  for  their 
services.     The  person  who  can  voluntarily  perceive  and 


44      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

observe  the  details  of  any  profession,  business,  or  trade 
will  go  far  in  that  vocation.  The  education  of  children 
should  take  the  faculty  of  perception  into  active  con- 
sideration. The  kindergarten  has  taken  some  steps  in 
this  direction,  but  there  is  much  more  to  be  done. 


CHAPTER  VII. 
Memory. 

PSYCHOLOGISTS  class  as  '^representative  men- 
tal processes''  those  known  as  memory  and 
imagination,  respectively.  The  term  ^'repre- 
sentation''  is  used  in  psychology  to  indicate  the  processes 
of  re-presentation  or  presenting  again  to  consciousness 
that  which  has  formerly  been  presented  to  it  but  which 
afterward  passed  from  its  field.  As  Hamilton  says: 
"The  general  capability  of  knowledge  necessarily  re- 
quires that,  besides  the  power  of  evoking  out  of  uncon- 
sciousness one  portion  of  our  retained  knowledge  in 
preference  to  another,  we  possess  the  faculty  of  repre- 
senting in  consciousness  what  is  thus  evoked.'' 

Memory  is  the  primary  representative  faculty  or 
power  of  the  mind.  Imagination  dependsjuponjaem- 
ory  for  its  material,  as  we  shall  see  when  we  consider 
that  faculty.  Every  mental  process  which  involves  the 
remembrance,  recollection,  or  representation  of  a  sen- 
sation, perception,  mental  image,  thought,  or  idea  pre- 
viously experienced  must  depend  upon  memory  for  its 
material.  Memory  is  the  great  storehouse  of  the  mind 
in  which  are  placed  the  records  of  previous  mental 
experiences.     It  is  a  part  of  the  great  subconscious  field 


46      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

of  mental  activity,  and  the  greater  part  of  its  work  is 
performed  below  the  plane  of  consciousness.  It  is  only 
when  its  results  are  passed  into  the  field  of  conscious- 
ness that  we  are  aware  of  its  existence.  We  know  mem- 
ory only  by  its  works.  Of  its  nature  we  know  but  little, 
although  certain  of  its  principal  laws  and  principles 
have  been  discovered. 

It  was  formerly  customary  to  class  memory  with  the 
various  faculties  of  the  mind,  but  later  psychology  no 
longer  so  considers  it.  Memory  is  now  regarded  as  a 
power  of  the  general  mind,  manifesting  in  connection 
with  every  faculty  of  the  mind.  It  is  now  regarded 
as  belonging  to  the  great  subconscious  field  of  menta- 
tion, and  its  explanation  must  be  sought  there.  It  is 
utterly  unexplainable  otherwise. 

The  importance  of  memory  cannot  be  overestimated. 
iSTot  only  does  a  man's  character  and  education  depend 
chiefly  upon  it,  but  his  very  mental  being  is  bound  up 
with  it.  If  there  were  no  memory,  man  would  never 
progress  mentally  beyond  the  mental  state  of  the  new- 
born babe.  He  would  never  be  able  to  profit  by  experi- 
ence. He  would  never  be  able  to  form  clear  percep- 
tions. He  would  never  be  able  to  reason  or  form 
judgments.  The  processes  of  thought  depend  for  ma- 
terial upon  the  memory  of  past  experiences;  this  mate- 
rial lacking,  there  can  be  no  thought. 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      47 

Memory  has  two  important  general  functions,  viz. : 

(1)  The  retention  of  impressions  and  experiences;  and 

(2)  the  reproduction  of  the  impressions  and  experi- 
ences so  retained. 

It  was  formerly  held  that  the  memory  retained  only 
a  portion  of  the  impressions  and  experiences  originally 
noted  by  it.  But  the  present  theory  is  that  it  retains 
every  impression  and  experience  which  is  noted  by  it. 
It  is  true  that  many  of  these  impressions  are  never 
reproduced  in  consciousness,  but  experiments  tend  to 
prove,  nevertheless,  that  the  records  are  still  in  the 
memory  and  that  appropriate  and  sufficiently  strong 
stimuli  will  bring  them  into  the  field  of  consciousness. 
The  phenomena  of  somnambulism,  dreams,  hysteria, 
delirium,  approach  of  death,  etc.,  show  that  the  sub- 
conscious mind  has  an  immense  accumulation  of  appar- 
ently forgotten  facts,  which  unusual  stimuli  will  serve 
to  recall. 

The  power  of  the  memory  to  reproduce  the  retained 
impressions  and  experiences  is  variously  called  remem- 
brance, recollection,  or  memory.  This  power  varies 
materially  in  various  individuals,  but  it  is  an  axiom  of 
psychology  that  the  memory  of  any  person  may  be 
developed  and  trained  by  practice.  The  ability  to  recall 
depends  to  a  great  extent  upon  the  clearness  and  depth 
of  the  original  impression,  which  in  turn  depends  upon 


48      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

the  degree  of  attention  given  to  it  at  the  time  of  its 
occurrence.  Recollection  is  also  greatly  aided  by  the 
law  of  association^  or  the  principle  whereby  one  mental 
fact  is  linked  to  another.  The  more  facts  to  which  a 
given  fact  is  linked,  the  greater  the  ease  by  which  it  is 
recalled  or  remembered.  Eecollection  is  also  greatly 
assisted  by  use  and  exercise.  Like  the  fingers,  the 
memory  cells  of  the  brain  become  expert  and  efficient 
by  use  and  exercise,  or  stiff  and  inefficient  by  lack  of 
the  same. 

In  addition  to  the  phases  of  retention  and  repro- 
duction, there  are  two  important  phases  of  memory, 
viz.:  (3)  Recognition  of  the  reproduced  impression  or 
experience;  and  (4)  localization  of  the  impression,  or 
its  reference  to  a  more  or  less  definite  time  and  place. 

The  recognition  of  the  recalled  impression  is  quite 
important.  It  is  not  enough  that  the  impression  be 
retained  and  recalled.  If  we  are  not  able  to  recognize 
the  recalled  impression  as  having  been  experienced  be- 
fore, the  recollection  will  be  of  but  little  use  to  us  in 
our  thought  processes ;  the  purposes  of  thought  demand 
that  we  shall  be  able  to  identify  the  recalled  impression 
with  the  original  one.  Recognition  is  really  re-cogni- 
tion— re-knowing.  Recognition  is  akin  to  perception. 
The  mind  becomes  conscious  of  the  recalled  impression 
just  as  it  becomes  conscious  of  the  sensation.     It  then 


YOUB  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      49 

recognizes  the  relation  of  the  recalled  impression  to  the 
original  one  just  as  it  realizes  the  relation  of  the  sensa- 
tion to  its  object. 

The  localization  of  the  recalled  and  recognized  im- 
pression is  also  important.  Even  if  we  recognize  the 
recalled  impression,  it  will  be  of  comparatively  little 
use  to  us  unless  we  are  able  to  locate  it  as  having  hap- 
pened yesterday,  last  week,  last  month,  last  year,  ten 
years  ago,  or  at  some  time  in  the  past;  and  as  having 
happened  in  our  office,  house,  or  in  such-and-such  a 
place  in  the  street,  or  in  some  distant  place.  Without 
the  power  of  localization  we  should  be  unable  to  con- 
nect and  associate  the  remembered  fact  with  the  time, 
place,  and  persons  with  which  it  should  be  placed  to  be 
of  use  and  value  to  us  in  our  thought  processes. 

Detention. 

The  retention  of  a  mental  impression  in  the  memory 
depends  very  materially  upon  the  clearness  and  depth 
of  the  original  impression.  And  this  clearness  and 
depth,  as  we  have  previously  stated,  depend  upon  the 
degree  of  attention  bestowed  upon  the  original  impres- 
sion. Attention,  then,  is  the  important  factor  in  the 
forming  and  recording  of  impressions.  The  rule  is: 
Slight  attention,  faint  record;  marked  attention,  clear 
and  deep  record.     To  fix  this  fact  in  the  mind,  the  stu- 


50      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

dent  may  think  of  the  retentive  and  reproductive 
phases  of  memory  as  a  phonographic  record.  The  re- 
ceiving diaphragm  of  the  phonograph  represenis  the 
sense  organs,  and  the  recording  needle  represents  the 
attention.  The  needle  makes  the  record  on  the  cylinder 
deep  or  faint  according  to  the  condition  of  the  needle. 
A  loud  sound  may  be  recorded  but  faintly,  if  the  needle 
is  not  properly  adjusted.  And,  further,  it  must  be 
remembered  that  the  strength  of  the  reproduction  de- 
pends almost  entirely  upon  the  clearness  and  depth  of 
the  original  impression  on  the  cylinder ;  as  is  the  record, 
so  is  the  reproduction.  It  will  be  well  for  the  student 
to  carry  this  symbol  of  the  phonograph  in  his  mind; 
it  will  aid  him  in  developing  his  powers  of  memory. 

In  this  connection  we  should  remember  that  atten- 
tion depends  largely  upon  interest.  Therefore  we  would 
naturally  expect  to  find  that  we  remember  interesting 
things  far  more  readily  than  those  which  lack  interest. 
This  supposition  is  borne  out  in  actual  experience. 
This  accounts  for  the  fact  that  every  one  remembers  a 
certain  class  of  things  better  than  he  does  others.  One 
remembers  faces,  another  dates,  another  spoken  con- 
versation, another  written  words,  and  so  on.  It  will  be 
found,  as  a  rule,  that  each  person  is  interested  in  the 
class  of  things  which  he  most  easily  remembers.  The 
artist  easily  remembers  faces  and  details  of  faces,  or 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT,      51 

scenery  and  details  thereof.  The  musician  easily  re- 
calls passages  or -bars  of  mnsic^  often  of  a  most  com- 
plicated nature.  The  speculator  easily  recalls  the 
quotations  of  his  favorite  stocks.  The  racing  man 
recalls  without  difficulty  the  ^^odds^^  posted  on  a  certain 
horse  on  a  certain  day,  or  the  details  of  a  race  which 
was  run  many  years  ago.  The  moral  is:  Arouse^ and 
induce^arv  interesiJifL-ihe  things  ivJiich  you  wish-4o 
remember.  This  interest  may  be  aroused  by  studying 
the  things  in  question,  as  we  have  suggested  in  a  pre- 
ceding chapter. 

Visualization  in  Memory. 

Many  of  the  best  authorities  hold  that  original  im- 
pressions may  be  made  clear  and  deep,  and  the  process 
of  reproduction  accordingly  rendered  more  efficient,  by 
the  practice  of  visualizing  the  thing  to  be  remembered. 
By  visualizing  is  meant  the  formation  of  a  mental  im- 
age of  the  thing  in  the  imagination.  If  you  wish  to 
remember  the  appearance  of  anything,  look  at  it  closely, 
with  attention,  and  then  turning  away  from  it  endeavor 
to  reproduce  its  appearance  as  a  mental  picture  in  the 
mind.  If  this  is  done,  a  particularly  clear  impression 
will  be  made  in  the  memory,  and  when  you  recall  the 
thing  you  will  find  that  you  will  also  recall  the  clear 
mental  image  of  it.     Of  course  the  greater  the  number 


52      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

of  details  observed  and  included  in  the  original  mental 
image,   the  greater  the  remembered   detail. 

Perceptiois^  IX  Memory. 

jS'ot  only  is  attention  necessary  in  forming  clear  mem- 
ory records,  but  careful  perception  is  also  important. 
Without  clear  perception  there  is  a  lack  of  detail  in  the 
retained  record,  and  the  element  of  association  is  lack- 
ing. It  is  not  enough  to  merely  remember  the  thing 
itself ;  we  should  also  remember  what  it  is,  and  all 
about  it.  The  practice  of  the  methods  of  developing 
perception,  given  in  a  preceding  lesson,  will  tend  to 
develop  and  train  the  retentive,  reproductive,  recogni- 
tive,  and  locative  powers  of  the  memory.  The  rule  is : 
The  greater  the  degree  of  perception  accorded  a  thing, 
the  greater  the  detail  of  the  retained  impression,  and 
the  greater  the  ease  of  the  recollection. 

Understanding  and  Memory. 

Another  important  point  in  acquiring  impressions  in 
memory  is  this:  That  the  better  the  understanding  of 
the  subject  or  object,  the  clearer  the  impressions  regard- 
ing it,  and  the  clearer  the  recollection  of  it.  This  fact 
is  proved  by  experiment  and  experience.  A  subject 
which  will  be  remembered  only  with  difficulty  under 
ordinary  circumstances  will  be  easily  remembered  if  it 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      53 

is  fully  explained  to  the  person,  and  accompanied  by  a 
few  familiar  illustrations  or  examples.  It  is  very  diffi- 
cult to  remember  a  meaningless  string  of  words,  while 
a  sentence  which  conveys  a  clear  meaning  may  be  mem- 
orized easily.  If  we  understand  what  a  thing  is  for, 
its  uses  and  employment,  we  remember  it  far  more 
easily  than  if  we  lack  this  understanding.  Elbring- 
haus,  who  conducted  a  number  of  experiments  along 
this  line,  reports  that  he  could  memorize  a  stanza  of 
poetry  in  about  one  tenth  the  time  required  to  memo- 
rize the  same  amount  of  nonsense  syllables.  Gordy 
states  that  he  once  asked  a  capable  student  of  the  Johns 
Hopkins  University  to  give  him  an  account  of  a  lecture 
to  which  he  had  just  listened.  "I  cannot  do  it,'^  re- 
plied the  student;  "it  was  not  logical. ^^  The  rule  is: 
The  more  one  knows  about  a  certain  thing,  the  more 
easily  is  that  thing  remembered.  This  is  a  point  worth 
noting. 


CHAPTEE  VIII. 

Memory — Continued. 

THE  subject  of  memory  cannot  be  touched  upon 
intelligently    without    a    consideration    of    the 
Law  of  Association,  one  of  the  important  psy- 
chological principles. 

The  Law  of  Association. 

What  is  known  in  psychology  as  the  Law  of  Asso- 
ciation is  based  on  the  fact  that  no  idea  exists  in  the 
mind  except  in  association  with  other  ideas.  This  is 
not  generally  recognized,  and  the  majority  of  persons 
will  dispute  the  law  at  first  thought.  But  the  existence 
and  appearance  of  ideas  in  the  mind  are  governed  by  a 
mental  law  as  invariable  and  constant  as  the  physical 
law  of  gravitation.  Every  idea  has  associations  with 
other  ideas.  Ideas  travel  in  groups,  and  one  group  is 
associated  with  another  group,  and  so  on,  until  in  the 
end  every  idea  in  one's  mind  is  associated  directly  or 
indirectly  with  every  other  idea.  Theoretically,  at 
least,  it  would  be  possible  to  begin  with  one  idea  in  the 
mind  of  a  person,  and  then  gradually  unwind  his  entire 
stock  of  ideas  like  the  yarn  on  the  ball.     Our  thoughts 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      55 

proceed  according  to  this  law.  We  sit  down  in  a 
^^brown  study'^  and  proceed  from  one  subject  to  another, 
until  we  are  unable  to  remember  any  connection  between 
the  first  thought  and  the  last.  But  each  step  of  the 
reverie  was  connected  with  the  one  preceding  and  the 
one  succeeding  it.  It  is  interesting  to  trace  back  these 
connections.  Poe  based  one  of  his  celebrated  detective 
stories  on  this  law.  The  reverie  may  be  broken  into 
by  a  sudden  impression  from  outside,  and  we  will  then 
proceed  from  that  impression,  connecting  it  with  some- 
thing else  already  in  our  experience,  and  starting  a  new 
chain  of  sequence. 

Often  we  fail  to  trace  the  associations  governing  our 
ideas,  but  the  chain  is  there  nevertheless.  One  may 
think  of  a  past  scene  or  experience  without  any  apparent 
cause.  A  little  thought  will  show  that  something  seen, 
or  a  few  notes  of  a  song  floating  to  the  ears,  or  the 
fragrance  of  a  flower,  has  supplied  the  connecting  link 
between  the  past  and  the  present.  A  suggestion  of 
mignonette  will  recall  some  past  event  in  which  the 
perfume  played  a  part;  some  one^s  handkerchief,  per- 
haps, carried  the  same  odor.  Or  an  old  familiar  tune 
reminds  one  of  some  one,  something,  or  some  place  in 
the  past.  A  familiar  feature  in  the  countenance  of  a 
passer-by  will  start  one  thinking  of  some  one  else  who 
had  that  kind  of  a  mouth,  that  shaped  nose,  or  that 


56      YOUR  MIND^AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

expression  of  the  eye — and  away  he  will  be  off  in  a 
sequence  of  remembered  experiences.  Often  the  start- 
ing idea^  or  the  connecting  links,  may  appear  but  dimly 
in  consciousness ;  but  rest  assured  they  are  always  there. 
In  fact,  we  frequently  accept  this  law,  unconsciously 
and  without  realizing  its  actual  existence.  For  instance, 
one  makes  a  remark,  and  at  once  we  wonder,  "How 
did  he  come  to  think  of  that?'^  and,  if  we  are  shrewd, 
we  may  discover  what  was  in  his  mind  before  he  spoke. 

There  are  two  general  classes  of  association  of  ideas 
in  memory,  viz.:  (1)  Association  of  contiguity,  and 
(2)   logical  association. 

Association  of  contiguity  is  that  form  of  association 
depending  upon  the  previous  association  in  time  or 
space  of  ideas  which  have  been  impressed  on  the  mind. 
For  instance,  if  you  met  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Wetterhorn  and 
were  introduced  to  them  one  after  the  other,  thereafter 
you  will  naturally  remember  Mr.  W.  when  you  think 
of  Mrs.  W.,  and  vice  versa.  You  will  naturally  remem- 
ber N*apoleon  when  you  think  of  Wellington,  or  Bene- 
dict Arnold  when  you  think  of  Major  Andre,  for  the 
same  reason.  You  will  also  naturally  remember  b  and  c 
when  you  think  of  a.  Likewise,  you  will  think  of  abstract 
time  when  you  think  of  abstract  space,  of  thunder  when 
you  think  of  lightning,  of  colic  when  you  recall  green 
apples,  of  love  making  and  moonlight  nights  when  you 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      57 

think  of  college  days.  In  the  same  way  we  remember 
things  which  occurred  just  before  or  just  after  the 
event  in  our  mind  at  the  moment;  of  things  near  in 
space  to  the  thing  of  which  we  are  thinking. 

Logical  association  depends  upon  the  relation  of 
likeness  or  difference  between  several  things  thought  of. 
Things  thus  associated  may  have  never  come  into  the 
mind  at  the  same  previous  time,  nor  are  they  neces- 
sarily connected  in  time  and  space.  One  may  think  of 
a  book,  and  then  proceed  by  association  to  think  of 
another  book  by  the  same  author,  or  of  another  author 
treating  of  the  same  subject.  Or  he  may  think  of  a 
book  directly  opposed  to  the  first,  the  relation  of  dis- 
tinct difference  causing  the  associated  idea.  Logical 
association  depends  upon  inner  relations,  and  not  upon 
the  outer  relations  of  time  and  space.  This  innerness 
of  relation  between  things  not  connected  in  space  or 
time  is  discovered  only  by  experience  and  education. 
The  educated  man  realizes  many  points  of  relationship 
between  things  that  are  thought  by  the  uneducated  man 
to  be  totally  unrelated.  Wisdom  and  knowledge  con- 
sist  largely   in   the   recognition   of   relations   between 

things. 

Association  iisr  Memory. 

It  follows  from  a  consideration  of  the  Law  of  Asso- 
ciation that  when  one  wishes  to  impress  a  thing  upon 


58      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

the  memory  he  should,  as  an  authority  says,  ^^Multiply 
associations;  entangle  the  fact  you  wish  to  remember 
in  a  net  of  as  many  associations  as  possible,  especially 
those  that  are  logical/^  Hence  the  advice  to  place  your 
facts  in  groups  and  classes  in  the  memory.  As  Blackie 
says:  ^^Nothing  helps  the  mind  so  much  as  order  and 
classification.  Classes  are  always  few,  individuals 
many;  to  know  the  class  well  is  to  know  what  is  most 
essential  in  the  character  of  the  individual,  and  what 
burdens  the  memory  least  to  retain/^ 


Repetition"  in  Memory. 

Another  important  principle  of  memory  is  that  the 
impressions  acquire  depth  and  clearness  by  repetition. 
Repeat  a  line  of  poetry  once,  and  you  may  remember  it ; 
repeat  it  again,  and  your  chances  of  remembering  it  are 
greatly  increased ;  repeat  it  a  sufficient  number  of  times, 
and  you  cannot  escape  remembering  it.  The  illustra- 
tion of  the  phonograph  record  will  help  you  to  under- 
stand the  reason  of  this.  The  rule  is:  Oonstant 
repetition  deepens  memory  impressions;  frequent  re- 
viewing and  recalling  what  has  been  memorized  tends 
to  Jceep  the  records  clear  and  clean,  beside  deepening 
the  impression  at  each  review. 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT,      59 

General  Eules  of  Memory. 

The  following  general  rules  will  be  of  service  to  the 
student  who  wishes  to  develop  his  memory: — 

Making  Impressions. 

(1)  Bestow  attention. 

(2)  Cultivate  interest. 

(3)  Manifest  perception. 

(4)  Cultivate  understanding. 

(5)  Form  associations. 

(6)  Eepeat  and  review. 

Recalling  Impressions, 

(1)  Endeavor  to  get  hold  of  the  loose  end  of  asso- 
ciation^ and  then  unwind  your  memory  ball  of  yarn. 

(2)  When  you  recall  an  impression,  send  it  back 
with  energy  to  deepen  the  impression,  and  attach  it  to 
as  many  new  associations  as  possible. 

(3)  Practice  a  little  memorizing  and  recalling  each 
day,  if  only  a  line  of  verse.  The  memory  improves  by 
practice,  and  deteriorates  by  neglect  and  disuse. 

(4)  Demand  good  service  of  your  memory,  and  it 
will  learn  to  respond.  Learn  to  trust  it,  and  it  will 
rise  to  the  occasion.  How  can  you  expect  your  mem- 
ory to  give  good  service  when  you  continually  abuse  it 
and  tell  every  one  of  "the  wretched  memory  I  have; 


60      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

I  can  never  remember  anything'^?  Your  memory  is 
very  apt  to  accept  your  statements  as  truth ;  our  mental 
faculties  have  an  annoying  habit  of  taking  us  at  our 
word  in  these  matters.  Tell  your  memory  what  you 
expect  it  to  do;  then  trust  it  and  refrain  from  abusing 
it  and  giving  it  a  bad  name. 

Final  Advice. 

Finally,  remember  this  rule:  You  get  out  of  your 
memory  only  that  which  you  place  in  it.  Place  in  it 
good,  clear,  deep  impressions,  and  it  will  reproduce 
good,  clear,  strong  recollections.  Think  of  your  mem- 
ory as  a  phonographic  record,  and  take  care  that  you 
place  the  right  kind  of  impressions  upon  it.  In  mem- 
ory you  reap  that  which  you  have  sown.  You  must 
give  to  the  memory  before  you  can  receive  from  it. 
Of  one  thing  you  may  rest  assured,  namely,  that  unless 
you  take  sufficient  interest  in  the  things  to  be  remem- 
bered, you  will  find  that  the  memory  will  not  take 
sufficient  interest  in  them  to  remember  them.  Memory 
demands  interest  before  it  will  take  interest  in  the  task. 
It  demands  attention  before  it  will  give  attention.  It 
demands  understanding  before  it  will  give  understand- 
ing. It  demands  association  before  it  will  respond  to 
association.  It  demands  repetition  before  it  will  re- 
peat.    The  memory  is  a  splendid  instrument,  but  it 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      61 

stands  on  its  dignity  and  asserts  its  rights.  It  belongs 
to  the  old  dispensation — it  demands  compensation  and 
believes  in  giving  only  in  equal  measure  to  what  it 
receives.  Our  advice  is  to  get  acquainted  with  your 
memory,  and  make  friends  with  it.  Treat  it  well  and 
it  will  serve  you  well.  But  neglect  it,  and  it  will  turn 
its  back  on  you. 


CHAPTEE  IX. 

Imagination. 

THE  imagination  belongs  to  the  general  class  of 
mental  processes  called  the  representative  facul- 
ties, by  which  is  meant  the  processes  in  which 
there  are  re-presented,  or  presented  again,  to  conscious- 
ness impressions  previously  presented  to  it. 

As  we  have  indicated  elsewhere,  the  imagination  is 
dependent  upon  memory  for  its  materials — its  records 
of  previous  impressions.  But  imagination  is  more  than 
mere  memory  or  recollection  of  these  previously  experi- 
enced and  recorded  impressions.  There  is,  in  addition 
to  the  re-presentation  and  recollection,  a  process  of 
arranging  the  recalled  impressions  into  new  forms  and 
new  combinations.  The  imagination  not  only  gathers 
together  the  old  impressions,  but  also  creates  new  com- 
binations and  forms  from  the  material  so  gathered. 

Psychology  gives  us  many  hairsplitting  definitions 
and  distinctions  between  simple  reproductive  imagina- 
tion and  memory,  but  these  distinctions  are  technical 
and  as  a  rule  perplexing  to  the  average  student.  In 
truth,  there  is  very  little,  if  any,  difference  between 
simple  reproductive  imagination  and  memory,  although 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USF  IT.      63 

when  the  imagination  indulges  in  constructive  activity 
a  new  feature  enters  into  the  process  which  is  absent  in 
pure  memory  operations.  In  simple  reproductive  imag- 
ination there  is  simply  the  formation  of  the  mental 
image  of  some  previous  experience — ^the  reproduction 
of  a  previous  mental  image.  This  differs  very  little 
from  memory,  except  that  the  recalled  image  is  clearer 
and  stronger.  In  the  same  way  in  ordinary  memory, 
in  the  manifestation  of  recollection,  there  is  often  the 
same  clear,  strong  mental  image  that  is  produced  in 
reproductive  imagination.  The  two  mental  processes 
blend  into  each  other  so  closely  that  it  is  practically 
impossible  to  draw  the  line  between  them,  in  spite  of 
the  technical  differences  urged  by  the  psychologists. 
Of  course  the  mere  remembrance  of  a  person  who  pre- 
sents himself  to  one  is  nearer  to  pure  memory  than  to 
imagination,  for  the  process  is  that  of  recognition. 
But  the  memory  or  remembrance  of  the  same  person 
when  he  is  absent  from  sight  is  practically  that  of 
reproductive  imagination.  Memory,  in  its  stage  of 
recognition,  exists  in  the  child  mind  before  reproduc- 
tive imagination  is  manifested.  The  latter,  therefore, 
is  regarded  as  a  higher  mental  process. 

But  still  higher  in  the  scale  is  that  which  is  known 
as  constructive  imagination.  This  form  of  imagina- 
tion appears  at  a  later  period  of  child  mentation,  and 


64      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

is  regarded  as  a  later  evolution  of  mental  processes  of 
the  race.  Gordy  makes  the  following  distinction  be- 
tween the  two  phases  of  imagination:  ^^The  difference 
between  reproductive  imagination  and  constructive 
imagination  is  that  the  images  resulting  from  repro- 
ductive imagination  are  copies  of  past  experience,  while 
those  resulting  from  constructive  imagination  are  not. 
*  *  *  To  learn  whether  any  particular  image,  or  com- 
bination of  images,  is  the  product  of  reproductive  or 
constructive  imagination,  all  we  have  to  do  is  to  learn 
whether  or  not  it  is  a  copy  of  a  past  experience.  Our 
memories,  of  course,  are  defective,  and  we  may  be  un- 
certain on  that  account;  but  apart  from  that,  we  need 
be  in  no  doubt  whatever.^^ 

Many  persons  hearing  for  the  first  time  the  state- 
ment of  psychologists  that  the  imaginative  faculties 
can  re-present  and  re-produce  or  re-combine  only  the 
images  which  have  previously  been  impressed  upon  the 
mind,  are  apt  to  object  that  they  can,  and  frequently 
do,  image  things  which  they  have  not  previously  experi- 
enced. But  can  they  and  do  they  ?  Is  it  not  true  that 
what  they  believe  to  be  original  creations  of  the  imag- 
ination are  merely  new  combinations  of  original  impres- 
sions ?  For  instance,  no  one  ever  saw  a  unicorn,  and  yet 
some  one  originally  imagined  its  form.  But  a  little 
thought  will  show  that  the   image  of  the  unicorn  is 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT,      65 

merely  that  of  an  animal  having  the  head,  neck,  and 
body  of  a  horse,  with  the  beard  of  a  goat,  the  legs  of  a 
buck,  the  tail  of  a  lion,  and  a  long,  tapering  horn, 
spirally  twisted,  in  the  middle  of  the  forehead.  Each 
of  the  several  parts  of  the  unicorn  exists  in  some  living 
animal,  although  the  unicorn,  composed  of  all  of  these 
parts,  is  non-existent  outside  of  fable.  In  the  same 
way  the  centaur  is  composed  of  the  body,  legs,  and  tail 
of  the  horse  and  the  trunk,  head,  and  arms  of  a  man. 
The  satyr  has  the  head,  body,  and  arms  of  a  man,  with 
the  horns,  legs,  and  hoofs  of  a  goat.  The  mermaid  has 
the  head,  arms,  and  trunk  of  a  woman,  joined  at  the 
waist  to  the  body  and  tail  of  a  fish.  The  mythological 
^^devir^  has  the  head,  body,  and  arms  of  a  man,  with 
the  horns,  legs,  and  cloven  foot  of  the  lower  animal, 
and  a  peculiar  tail  composed  of  that  of  some  animal  but 
tipped  with  a  spearhead.  Each  of  these  characteristics 
is  composed  of  familiar  images  of  experience.  The  im- 
agination may  occupy  itself  for  a  lifetime  turning  out 
impossible  animals  of  this  kind,  but  every  part  thereof 
will  be  found  to  correspond  to  something  existent  in 
nature,  and  experienced  by  the  mind  of  the  person  cre- 
ating the  strange  beast. 

In  the  same  way  the  imagination  may  picture  a 
familiar  person  or  thing  acting  in  an  unaccustomed 
manner,  the  latter  having  no  basis  in  fact  so  far  as  the 


66      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

individual  person  or  thing  is  concerned,  but  being  war- 
ranted by  some  experience  concerning  other  persons  or 
things.  For  instance,  one  may  easily  form  the  image 
of  a  dog  swimming  under  water  like  a  fish,  or  climbing 
a  tree  like  a  cat.  Likewise,  one  may  form  a  mental 
image  of  a  learned,  bewigged  High  Chancellor,  or  a 
venerable  Archbishop  of  Canterbury,  dressed  like  a 
clown,  standing  on  his  head,  balancing  a  colored  foot- 
ball on  his  feet,  sticking  his  tongue  in  his  cheek  and 
winking  at  the  audience.  In  the  same  way  one  may 
imagine  a  railroad  running  across  a  barren  desert,  or  a 
steep  mountain,  upon  which  there  is  not  as  yet  a  rail 
laid.  The  bridge  across  a  river  may  be  imaged  in  the 
same  way.  In  fact,  this  is  the  way  that  everything 
is  mentally  created,  constructed,  or  invented — the  old 
materials  being  combined  in  a  new  way,  and  arranged 
in  a  new  fashion.  Some  psychologists  go  so  far  as  to 
say  that  no  mental  image  of  memory  is  an  exact  repro- 
duction of  the  original  impression;  that  there  are  al- 
ways changes  due  to  the  unconscious  operation  of  the 
constructive  imagination. 

The  constructive  imagination  is  able  to  ^^tear  things 
to  pieces^^  in  search  for  material,  as  well  as  to  "join 
things  together'^  in  its  work  of  building.  The  impor- 
tance of  the  imagination  in  all  the  processes  of  intel- 
lectual thought  is  great.     Without  imagination  man 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.        67 

A 

coi^ld  not  reason  or  manifest  any  intellectual  process. 
It  ik  impossible  to  consider  the  subject  of  thought  with- 
out first  regarding  the  processes  of  imagination.  And 
yet  it\is  common  to  hear  persons  speak  of  the  imag- 
ination, as  ^if  it ,  were  a  faculty  of  mere  fancy,  useless 
and  without  plaiie  in  the  practical  world  of  thought. 

.      \  I  \ 

Developing  the  Imaginatioist. 

The  invagination  is  capable  of  development  and  train- 
ing. Tlie  general  rules  for  development  of  the  imag- 
ination are  practically  those  which  we  have  stated  in 
connection  with  the  development  of  the  memory.  There 
is  the  same  necessity  for  plenty  of  material;  for  the 
formation  of  clear  and  deep  impressions  and  clear-cut 
mental  images;  the  same  necessity  for  repeated  impres- 
sion, and  the  frequent  use  and  employment  of  the 
faculty.  The  practice  of  visualization,  of  course, 
strengthens  the  power  of  the  imagination  as  it  does 
that  of  the  memory,  the  two  powers  being  intimately 
related.  The  imagination  may  be  strengthened  and 
trained  by  deliberately  recalling  previous  impressions 
and  then  combining  them  into  new  relations.  The 
materials  of  memory  may  be  torn  apart  and  then  re- 
combined  and  re-grouped.  In  the  same  way  one  inay> 
enter  into  the  feelings  and  thoughts  of  other  persons  r 
by  imagining  one^s  self  in  their  place  and  endeavoring  \ 


68      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

to  act  out  in  imagination  the  life  of  such  persons.  In 
this  way  one  may  build  up  a  much  fuller  and  broader 
conception  of  human  nature  and  human  motives. 

In  this  place,  also,  we  should  caution  the  student 
against  the  common  waste  of  the  powers  of  the  imagina- 
tion, and  the  dissipation  of  its  powers  in  idle  fancies 
and  daydreams.  Many  persons  misuse  their  imagina- 
tion in  this  way  and  not  only  weaken  its  power  for 
effective  work  but  also  waste  their  time  and  energy. 
Daydreams  are  notoriously  unfit  for  the  real,  practical 

work  of  life. 

Imagination  and  Ideals. 

And,  finally,  the  student  should  remember  that  in  the 
category  of  the  imaginative  powers  must  be  placed  that 
phase  of  mental  activity  which  has  so  much  to  do  with 
the  making  or  marring  of  one's  life — the  formation  of 
ideals.  Our  ideals  are  the  patterns  after  which  we 
shape  our  life.  According  to  the  nature  of  our  ideals 
is  the  character  of  the  life  we  lead. 

Our  ideals  are  the  supports  of  that  which  we  call 
character. 

It  is  a  truth,  old  as  the  race,  and  now  being  per- 
ceived most  clearly  by  thinkers,  that  indeed  "as  a  man 
thinketh  in  his  heart  so  is  he.^'  The  influence  of  our 
ideals  is  perceived  to  affect  not  only  our  character  but 
also  our  place  and  degree  of  success  in  life.     We  grow 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      69 

to  be  that  of  which  we  have  held  ideals.  If  we  create 
an  ideal,  either  of  general  qualities  or  else  these  quali- 
ties as  manifested  by  some  person  living  or  dead,  and 
keep  that  ideal  ever  before  us,  we  cannot  help  develop- 
ing traits  and  qualities  corresponding  to  those  of  our 
ideal.  Careful  thought  will  show  that  character  depends 
greatly  upon  the  nature  of  our  ideals;  therefore  we  see 
the  effect  of  the  imagination  in  character  building. 

Moreover,  our  imagination  has  an  important  bearing 
on  our  actions.  Many  a  man  has  committed  an  im- 
prudent or  immoral  act  which  he  would  not  have  done 
had  he  been  possessed  of  an  imagination  which  showed 
him  the  probable  results  of  the  action.  In  the  same 
way  many  men  have  been  inspired  to  great  deeds  and 
achievements  by  reason  of  their  imagination  picturing 
to  them  the  possible  results  of  certain  action.  The  ^^big 
things^^  in  all  walks  of  life  have  been  performed  by 
men  who  had  sufficient  imagination  to  picture  the  pos- 
sibilities of  certain  courses  or  plans.  The  railroads, 
bridges,  telegraph  lines,  cable  lines,  and  other  works  of 
man  are  the  results  of  the  imagination  of  some  men. 
The  good  fairy  godmother  always  provides  a  vivid  and 
lively  imagination  among  the  gifts  she  bestows  upon 
her  beloved  godchildren.  Well  did  the  old  philosopher 
pray  to  the  gods :  "And,  with  all,  give  unto  me  a  clear 
and  active  imagination.^^ 


70      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

The  dramatic  values  of  life  depend  upon  the  quality 
of  the  imagination.  Life  without  imagination  is  me- 
chanical and  dreary.  Imagination  may  increase  the 
susceptibility  to  pain,  but  it  pays  for  this  by  increasing 
the  capacity  for  joy  and  happiness.  The  pig  has  but 
little  imagination, — little  pain  and  little  joy, — ^but  who 
envies  the  pig?  The  person  with  a  clear  and  active 
imagination  is  in  a  measure  a  creator  of  his  world,  or 
at  least  a  re-creator.  He  takes  an  active  part  in  the 
creative  activities  of  the  universe,  instead  of  being  e 
mere  pawn  pushed  here  and  there  in  the  game  of  life. 

Again,  the  divine  gift  of  sympathy  and  understand- 
ing depends  materially  upon  the  possession  of  a  good 
imagination.  One  can  never  understand  the  pain  or 
problems  of  another  unless  he  first  can  imagine  him- 
self in  the  place  of  the  other.  Imagination  is  at  the 
very  heart  of  sympathy.  One  may  be  possessed  of  great 
capacity  for  feeling,  but  owing  to  his  lack  of  imagina- 
tion may  never  have  this  feeling  called  into  action. 
The  person  who  would  sympathize  with  others  must  first 
learn  to  understand  them  and  feel  their  emotions.  This 
he  can  do  only  if  he  has  the  proper  degree  of  imagina- 
tion. Those  who  reach  the  heart  of  the  people  must 
first  be  reached  by  the  feelings  of  the  people.  And  this 
is  possible  only  to  him  whose  imagination  enables  him 
to  picture  himself  in  the  same  condition  as  others,  and 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      71 

thus  awaken  his  latent  feelings  and  sympathies  and 
understanding.  Thus  it  is  seen  that  the  imagination 
touches  not  only  our  intellectual  life  but  also  our  emo- 
tional nature.     Imagination  is  the  very  life  of  the  soul. 


CHAPTER  X. 

The  Feelings. 

IN  thinking  of  the  mind  and  its  activities  we  are 
accustomed  to  the  general  idea  that  the  mental 
processes  are  chiefly  those  of  intellect^  reason, 
thought.  But,  as  a  fact,  the  greater  part  of  the  mental 
activities  are  those  concerned  with  feeling  and  emotion. 
The  intellect  is  the  youngest  child  of  the  mind,  and 
while  making  its  presence  strenuously  known  in  the 
manner  of  all  youngest  children  so  that  one  is  perhaps 
justified  in  regarding  it  as  ^'^the  whole  tiling'^  in  the 
family,  nevertheless  it  really  plays  but  a  comparatively 
small  part  in  the  general  work  of  the  mental  family. 
The  activities  of  the  ^^feeling'^  side  of  life  greatly  out- 
number those  of  the  ^^thinking"  side,  are  far  stronger 
in  their  influence  and  effect,  as  a  rule,  and,  in  fact,  so 
color  the  intellectual  processes,  unconsciouslj^,  as  to  con- 
stitute their  distinctive  quality  except  in  the  case  of  a 
very  few  advanced  thinkers. 

But  there  is  a  difference  between  ^^feeling"  and  "emo- 
tion,^^  as  the  terms  are  employed  in  psychology.  The 
former  is  the  simple  phase,  the  latter  the  complex. 
Generally   speaking,   the   resemblance   or   difference   is 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      73 

akin  to  that  existing  between  sensation  and  perception, 
as  explained  in  a  previous  chapter.  Beginning  with 
the  simple,  in  order  later  on  to  reach  the  complex,  we 
shall  now  consider  that  which  is  known  as  simple  "feel- 
ing.'^ 

The  term  ^^feeling/^  as  used  in  this  connection  in 
3sychology,  has  been  defined  as  ^*the  simple  agreeable 
:>T  disagreeable  side  of  any  mental  state/'  These  agree- 
able or  disagreeable  sides  of  mental  states  are  quite 
distinct  from  the  act  of  knowing,  which  accompanies 
them.  One  may  perceive  and  thus  ^^know'^  that  another 
is  speaking  to  him  and  be  fully  aware  of  the  words 
being  used  and  of  their  meaning.  Ordinarily,  and  so 
far  as  pure  thought  processes  are  concerned,  this  would 
complete  the  mental  state.  But  we  must  reckon  on  the 
feeling  side  as  well  as  on  the  thinking  side  of  the  mental 
state.  Accordingly  we  find  that  the  knowledge  of  the 
words  of  the  other  person  and  the  meaning  thereof 
results  in  a  mental  state  agreeable  or  disagreeable.  In 
the  same  way  the  reading  of  the  words  of  a  book,  the 
hearing  of  a  song,  or  a  sight  or  scene  perceived,  may 
result  in  a  more  or  less  strong  feeling,  agreeable  or  dis- 
agreeable. This  sense^of^agreeable  or  disagreeable  con- 
sciousness  is  the  essential  characteristic  of  what  we^  call 
"feeling.^' 

It  is  very  difficult  to  explain  feeling  except  in  its  own 


U      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

terms.  We  know  very  well  what  we  mean,  or  what 
another  means,  when  it  is  said  that  we  or  he  'Jeels  sad/^ 
or  has  "a  joyous  feeling/^  or  ^^a  feeling  of  interest/' 
And  yet  we  shall  find  it  very  hard  to  explain  the  mental 
state  except  in  terms  of  feeling  itself.  Our  knowledge 
depends  entirely  upon  our  previous  experience  of  the 
feeling.  As  an  authority  says :  ^^If  we  have  never  felt 
pleasure,  pain,  fear,  or  sorrow,  a  quarto  volume  cannot 
make  us  understand  what  such  a  mental  state  is.'' 
Every  mental  state  is  not  distinguished  by  strong  feel- 
ing. There  are  certain  mental  states  which  are  con- 
cerned chiefly  with  intellectual  effort,  and  in  which  all 
trace  of  feeling  seems  to  be  absent,  unless,  as  some  have 
claimed,  the  "feeling''  of  interest  or  the  lack  of  same 
is  a  faint  form  of  the  feeling  of  pleasure  or  pain. 
Habit  may  dull  the  feeling  of  a  mental  state  until  it  is 
apparently  neutral,  but  there  is  generally  a  faint  feeling 
of  like  or  dislike  still  left. 

The  elementary  forms  of  feeling  are  closely  allied 
with  those  of  simple  sensation.  But  experiments  have 
revealed  that  there  is  a  distinction  in  consciousness.  It 
has  been  discovered  that  one  is  often  conscious  of  the 
"touch"  of  a  heated  object  before  he  is  of  the  feeling 
or  pain  resulting  from  it.  Psychologists  have  pointed 
out  another  distinction,  namely:  When  we  experience 
a   sensation   we    are    accustomed   to    refer   it   to    the 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      75 

outside  thing  which  is  the  object  of  it,  as  when  we 
touch  the  heated  object;  but  when  we  experience  a  feel- 
ing we  instinctively  refer  it  to  ourself,  as  when  the 
heated  object  gives  us  pain.  As  an  authority  has  said : 
^^My  feelings  belong  to  me;  but  my  sensations  seem  to 
belong  to  the  object  which  caused  them/' 

Another  proof  of  the  difference  and  distinction  be- 
tween sensation  and  feeling  is  the  fact  that  the  same 
sensation  will  produce  different  feelings  in  different 
persons  experiencing  the  former,  even  at  the  same  time. 
For  instance,  the  same  sight  will  cause  one  person  to 
feel  elated,  and  the  other  depressed;  the  same  words 
will  produce  a  feeling  of  joy  in  one,  and  a  feeling  of 
sorrow  in  another.  The  same  sensation  will  produce 
different  feelings  in  the  same  person  at  different  times. 
An  authority  well  says:  "You  drop  your  purse,  and 
you  see  it  lying  on  the  ground  as  you  stoop  to  pick  it 
up,  with  no  feeling  either  of  pleasure  or  pain.  But 
if  you  see  it  after  you  have  lost  it  and  have  hunted  for 
it  a  long  time  in  vain,  you  have  a  pronounced  feeling 
of  pleasure.'' 

There  is  a  vast  range  of  degree  and  kind  in  feeling. 
Gordy  says :  "All  forms  of  pleasure  and  pain  are  called 
feelings.  Between  the  pleasure  which  comes  from  eat- 
ing a  peach  and  that  which  results  from  solving  a  diffi- 
cult problem,  or  learning  good  news  of  a  friend,  or 


76      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

thinking  of  the  progress  of  civilization — ^between  the 
pain  that  results  from  a  cut  in  the  hand  and  that  which 
results  from  the  failure  of  a  long-cherished  plan  or  the 
death  of  a  friend — there  is  a  long  distance.  But  the 
one  group  are  all  pleasures;  the  other  all  pains.  And, 
whatever  the  source  of  the  pleasure  or  pain,  it  is  alike 
feeling/^ 

There  are  many  different  kinds  of  feelings.  Some 
arise  from  sensations  of  physical  comfort  or  discomfort ; 
others  from  purely  physiological  conditions;  others 
from  the  satisfaction  of  accustomed  tastes,  or  the  dis- 
satisfaction arising  from  the  stimulation  of  unaccus- 
tomed tastes;  others  from  the  presence  or  absence  of 
comfort;  others  from  the  presence  or  absence  of  things 
or  persons  for  whom  we  have  an  affection  or  liking. 
Over-indulgence  often  transforms  the  feeling  of  pleas- 
ure into  that  of  pain ;  and,  likewise,  habit  and*  practice 
may  cause  us  to  experience  a  pleasurable  feeling  from 
that  which  formerly  inspired  feeling  of.  an  opposite  kind. 
Feelings  also  differ  in  degree ;  that  is  to  say,  some  things 
cause  us  to  experience  pleasurable  feelings  of  a  greater 
intensity  than  do  others,  and  some  cause  us  to  experi- 
ence painful  feelings  of  a  greater  intensity  than  do 
others.  These  degrees  of  intensity  depend  more  or  less 
upon  the  habit  or  experience  of  the  individual.  As  a 
general  rule,  feelings  may  be  classified  into  (1)  those 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      77 

arising  from  physical  sensations,  and  (3)  those  arising 
from  ideas. 

The  feelings  depending  upon  physical  sensations 
arise  either  from  inherited  tendencies  and  inclinations 
or  from  acquired  habits  and  experience.  It  is  an  axiom 
of  the  evolutionary  school  that  any  physical  activity 
that  has  been  a  habit  of  the  race,  long  continued,  be- 
comes an  instinctive  pleasure-giving  activity  in  the 
individual.  For  instance,  the  race  for  many  genera- 
tions was  compelled  to  hunt,  fish,  travel,  swim,  etc.,  in 
order  to  maintain  existence.  The  result  is  that  we,  the 
descendants,  are  apt  to  find  pleasure  in  the  same  activi- 
ties as  sport,  games,  exercise,  etc.  Many  of  our  tenden- 
cies and  feelings  are  inherited  in  this  way.  To  these 
we  have  added  many  acquired  habits  of  physical  activ- 
ity, which  follow  the  same  rule,  i,  e.,  that  habit  and 
practice  impart  more  or  less  pleasurable  feeling.  We 
find  more  pleasure  in  doing  those  things  which  we  can 
do  easily  or  quite  well  than  in  the  opposite  kind  of 
things. 

The  feelings  depending  upon  ideas  may  also  arise 
from  inheritance.  Many  of  our  mental  tendencies  and 
inclinations  have  come  down  to  us  from  the  past.  There 
are  certain  feelings  that  are  born  in  one,  without  a 
doubt;  that  is  to  say,  there  is  a  great  capacity  for  such 
feelings  which  will  be  transformed  into  manifestation 


78      YOUB  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

upon  the  presentation  of  the  proper  stimulus.  Other 
mental  feelings  depend  upon  our  individual  past  experi- 
ence, association,  or  suggestions  from  others — upon  our 
past  environment,  in  fact.  The  ideals  of  those  around 
us  will  cause  us  to  experience  pleasure  or  pain,  as  the 
case  may  be,  under  certain  circumstances;  the  force  of 
suggestion  along  these  lines  is  very  strong  indeed.  Not 
only  do  we  experience  feelings  in  response  to  present 
sensations,  but  the  recollection  of  some  previous  experi- 
ence will  also  arouse  feeling.  In  fact,  feelings  of  this 
kind  are  closely  bound  up  with  memory  and  imagina- 
tion. Persons  of  vivid  imagination  are  apt  to  feel 
far  more  than  others.  They  suffer  more,  and  enjoy 
more.  Our  sympathies,  which  depend  largely  upon  our 
imaginative  power,  are  the  cause  of  many  of  our  feel- 
ings of  this  kind. 

Many  of  the  facts  which  we  generally  ascribe  to  feel- 
ing are  really  a  part  of  the  phenomena  of  emotion,  the 
latter  being  the  more  complex  phase  of  feeling.  For 
the  purposes  of  this  consideration  we  have  regarded 
simple  feeling  as  the  raw  material  of  emotion,  the  rela- 
tion being  compared  to  that  existing  between  sensation 
and  perception.  In  our  consideration  of  emotion  we 
shall  see  the  fuller  manifestation  of  feeling,  and  its 
more  complex  expressions. 


CHAPTER  XL 

The  E^motions. 

As  we  have  seen  in  the  preceding  lessons,  an  emo- 
tion is  the  more  complex  phase  of  feeling. 
^  As  a  rule  an  emotion  arises  from  a  number 
of  feelings.  Moreover,  it  is  of  a  higher  order  of  mental 
activity.  As  we  have  seen,  a  feeling  may  arise  either 
from  a  physical  sensation  or  from  an  idea.  Emotion, 
however,  as  a  rule,  is  dependent  upon  an  idea  for  its 
expression,  and  always  upon  an  idea  for  its  direction 
and  its  continuance.  Feeling,  of  course,  is  the  ele- 
mental spirit  of  all  emotional  states,  and,  as  an  author- 
ity has  said,  is  the  thread  upon  which  the  emotional 
states  are  strung. 

Halleck  says:  ^^When  representative  ideas  appear, 
the  feeling  in  combination  with  them  produces  emotion. 
After  the  waters  of  the  Missouri  combine  with  another 
stream,  they  receive  a  different  name,  although  they 
flow  toward  the  gulf  in  as  great  volume  as  before. 
Suppose  we  liken  the  feeling  due  to  sensation  to  the 
Missouri  River;  the  train  of  representative  ideas  to  the 
Mississippi  before  its  junction  with  the  Missouri.  Emo- 
tion may  then  be  likened  to  the  Mississippi  after  its 


80      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

junction — after  feeling  has  combined  with  representa- 
tive ideas-  The  emotional  stream  will  not  be  broader 
and  deeper  than  before.  This  analogy  is  employed  only 
to  make  the  distinction  clearer.  The  student  must  re- 
member that  mental  powers  are  never  actually  as  dis- 
tinct as  two  rivers  before  their  union.  *  *  *  The 
student  must  beware  of  thinking  that  we  have  done 
Avith  feeling  when  we  consider  emotion.  Just  as  the 
waters  of  the  Missouri  flow  on  until  they  reach  the  gulf, 
so  does  feeling  run  through  every  emotional  state.^^  In 
the  above  analogy  the  term  ^^representative  ideas/^  of 
course,  means  the  ideas  of  memory  and  imagination  as 
explained  in  previous  chapters. 

There  is  a  close  relation  between  emotion  and  the 
physical  expression  thereof — a  peculiar  mutual  action 
and  reaction  between  the  mental  state  and  the  physical 
action  accompanying  it.  Psychologists  are  divided  re- 
garding this  relation.  One  school  holds  that  the  phys- 
ical expression  follows  and  results  from  the  mental 
state.  For  instance,  we  hear  or  see  something,  and 
thereupon  experience  the  feeling  or  emotion  of  anger. 
This  emotional  feeling  reacts  upon  the  body  and  causes 
an  increased  heart  beat,  a  tight  closing  of  the  lips,  a 
frown  and  lowered  eyebrows,  and  clinched  fists.  Or 
we  may  perceive  something  which  causes  the  feeling  or 
emotion  of  fear,  which  reacts  upon  the  body  and  pro- 


YOUB  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT,      81 

duces  pallor,  raising  of  the  hair,  dropping  of  the  jaw, 
opening  of  the  eyelids,  trembling  of  the  legs,  etc.  Ac- 
cording to  this  school,  and  the  popular  idea,  the  mental 
state  precedes  and  causes  the  physical  expression. 

But  another  school  of  psychology,  of  which  the  late 
Prof.  William  James  is  a  leading  authority,  holds 
that  the  physical  expression  precedes  and  causes  the 
mental  state.  For  instance,  in  the  cases  above  cited, 
the  perception  of  the  anger-causing  or  fear-causing 
sight  first  causes  a  reflex  action  upon  the  muscles,  ac- 
cording to  inherited  race  habits  of  expression.  This 
muscular  expression  and  activity,  in  turn,  is  held  to 
react  upon  the  mind  and  to  cause  the  feeling  or  emotion 
of  anger  or  fear,  as  the  case  may  be.  Professor  James, 
in  some  of  his  works,  makes  a  forcible  argument  in  sup- 
port of  this  theory,  and  his  opinions  have  influenced 
the  scientific  thought  of  the  day  upon  this  subject. 
Others,  however,  have  sought  to  combat  his  theory  by 
equally  forcible  argument,  and  the  subject  is  still  under 
lively  and  spirited  discussion  in  psychological  circles. 

Without  taking  sides  in  the  above  controversy,  many 
psychologists  proceed  upon  the  hypothesis  that  there  is 
a  mutual  action  and  reaction  between  emotional  mental 
states  and  the  appropriate  physical  expression  thereof, 
each  in  a  measure  being  the  cause  of  the  other,  and  each 
likewise  being  the  effect  of  the  other.     For  instance,  in 


82      YOUR  MIND  AND)  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

• 

the  cases  above  cited,  the  perception  of  the  anger-pro- 
ducing or  fear-producing  sight  causes,  almost  or  quite 
simultaneously,  the  emotional  mental  state  of  anger  or 
fear,  as  the  case  may  be,  and  the  physical  expression 
thereof.  Then  rapidly  ensues  a  series  of  mental  and 
physical  reactions.  The  mental  state  acts  upon  the 
physical  expression  and  intensifies  it.  The  physical 
expression  in  turn  reacts  upon  the  mental  state  and 
induces  a  more  intense  degree  of  the  emotional  feeling. 
And  so  on,  until  the  mental  state  and  physical  expres- 
sion reach  their  highest  point  and  then  begin  to  subside 
from  exhaustion  of  energy.  This  middle-ground  con- 
ception meets  all  the  requirements  of  the  facts,  and  is 
probably  more  nearly  correct  than  either  extreme  theory. 
Darwin  in  his  classic  work,  ^The  Expression  of  the 
Emotions  in  Man  and  Animals,^^  has  thrown  a  great 
light  on  the  subject  of  the  expression  of  emotion  in 
physical  motions.  The  Florentine  scientist,  Paolo 
Mantegazza,  added  to  Darwin's  work  with  ideas  of  his 
own  and  countless  examples  drawn  from  his  own  expe- 
rience and  observation.  The  work  of  Frangois  Delsarte, 
the  founder  of  the  school  of  expression  which  bears  his 
name,  is  also  a  most  valuable  addition  to  the  thought  on 
this  subject.  The  subject  of  the  relation  and  reaction 
between  emotional  feeling  and  physical  expression  is  a 
most  fascinating  one,  and  one  in  which  we  may  expect 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      83 

interesting  and  valuable  discoveries  during  the  next 
twenty  years. 

The  relation  and  reaction  above  mentioned  are  inter- 
esting not  only  from  the  viewpoint  of  theory  but  also 
because  of  their  practicable  application  in  emotional  de- 
velopment and  training.  It  is  an  established  truth  of 
psychology  that  each  physical  expression  of  an  emo- 
tional state  serves  to  intensify  the  latter;  it  is  pouring 
oil  on  the  fire.  Likewise,  it  is  equally  true  that  the 
repression  of  the  physical  expression  of  an  emotion 
tends  to  restrain  and  inhibit  the  emotion  itself. 

Halleck  says :  "If  we  watch  a  person  growing  angry, 
we  shall  see  the  emotion  increase  as  he  talks  loud, 
frowns  deeply,  clinches  his  fist,  and  gesticulates  wildly. 
Each  expression  of  his  passion  is  reflected  back  upon 
the  original  anger  and  adds  fuel  to  the  fire.  If  he 
resolutely  inhibits  the  muscular  expressions  of  his  an- 
ger, it  will  not  attain  great  intensity,  and  it  will  soon 
die  a  quiet  death.  *  *  *  Not  without  reason  are  those 
persons  called  cold  blooded  who  habitually  restrain  as 
far  as  possible  the  expression  of  their  emotion;  who 
never  frown  or  throw  any  feeling  into  their  tones,  even 
when  a  wrong  inflicted  upon  some  one  demands  ag- 
gressive measures.  There  is  here  no  wave  of  bodily  ex- 
pression to  flow  back  and  augment  the  emotional  state.^^ 

In  this    connection   we   call   vour   attention   to   the 


84      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

familiar  and  oft-quoted  passage  from  the  works  of 
Prof.  William  James:  ^^Eefuse  to  express  a  passion 
and  it  dies.  Count  ten  before  venting  your  anger  and 
its  occasion  seems  ridiculous.  Whistling  to  keep  up 
courage  is  no  mere  figure  of  speech.  On  the  other  hand, 
sit  all  day  in  a  moping  posture,  sigh  and  reply  to  every- 
thing with  a  dismal  voice,  and  your  melancholy  lingers. 
There  is  no  more  valuable  precept  in  moral  education 
than  this,  as  all  who  have  experience  know:  If  we 
wish  to  conquer  undesirable  emotional  tendencies  in 
ourselves,  we  must  assiduously,  and  in  the  first  instance 
cold-bloodedly,  go  through  the  outward  movements  of 
those  contrary  dispositions  which  we  prefer  to  cultivate. 
Smooth  the  brow,  brighten  the  eye,  contract  the  dorsal 
rather  than  the  ventral  aspect  of  the  frame,  and  speak 
in  a  major  key,  and  your  heart  must  be  frigid  indeed 
if  it  does  not  gradually  thaw.'^ 

Along  the  same  lines  Halleck  says:  ^^Actors  have 
frequently  testified  to  the  fact  that  emotion  will  arise 
if  they  go  through  the  appropriate  muscular  movements. 
In  talking  to  a  character  on  the  stage,  if  they  clinch 
the  fists  and  frown,  they  often  find  themselves  becoming 
really  angry;  if  they  start  with  counterfeit  laughter, 
they  find  themselves  growing  cheerful.  A  German  pro- 
fessor says  that  he  cannot  walk  with  a  schoolgirFs 
mincing  step  and  air  without  feeling  frivolous.^^ 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      85 

The  wise  student  will  acquire  a  great  control  over  his 
emotional  nature  if  he  will  re-read  and  study  the  above 
statements  and  quotations  until  he  has  grasped  their 
spirit  and  essence.  In  those  few  lines  he  is  given  a 
philosophy  of  self-control  and  self-mastery  that  will  be 
worth  much  to  him  if  he  will  but  apply  it  in  practice. 
Patience,  perseverance,  practice,  and  will  are  required, 
but  the  reward  is  great.  Even  to  those  who  have  not 
the  persistency  to  apply  this  truth  fully,  there  will  be 
a  partial  reward  if  they  will  use  it  to  the  extent  of 
restraining  so  far  as  possible  any  undue  physical  ex- 
pression of  undesirable  emotional  excitement. 

Some  writers  seem  to  regard  capacity  for  great  emo- 
tional excitement  and  expression  as  a  mark  of  a  rich 
and  full  character  or  noble  soul.  This  is  far  from  be- 
ing true.  While  it  is  a  fact  that  the  cultivation  of 
certain  emotions  tends  to  create  a  noble  character  and 
a  full  life,  it  is  equally  true  that  the  tendency  to  ^^gush'' 
and  indulge  in  hysterical  or  sentimental  excesses  is  a 
mark  of  an  ill-controlled  nature  and  a  weak,  rather  than 
strong,  character.  Moreover,  it  is  a  fact  that  excess 
in  emotional  excitement  and  expression  tends  toward 
the  dissipation  of  the  finer  and  nobler  feelings  which 
otherwise  would  seek  an  outlet  in  actual  doing  and  prac- 
tical action.  In  the  language  of  the  old  Scotch  engi- 
neer in  the  story,  they  are  like  the  old  locomotive  which 


86      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

^^spends  sae  much  steam  at  the  whustle  that  she  hae 
nane  left  to  gae  by/^ 

Emotional  excitement  and  expression  are  largely  de- 
pendent upon  habit  and  indulgence,  although  there  is 
a  great  difference,  of  course,  in  the  emotional  nature 
and  tendencies  of  various  persons.  Emotions,  like 
physical  actions  or  intellectual  processes,  become  habit- 
ual by  repetition.  And  habit  renders  all  physical  or 
mental  actions  easy  of  repetition.  Each  time  one  mani- 
fests anger,  the  deeper  the  mental  path  is  made,  and 
the  easier  it  is  to  travel  that  path  the  next  time.  In 
the  same  way  each  time  that  anger  is  conquered  and 
inhibited,  the  easier  will  it  be  to  restrain  it  the  next 
time.  In  the  same  way  desirable  habits  of  emotion  and 
expression  may  be  formed. 

Another  point  in  the  cultivation,  training,  and  re- 
straint of  the  emotions  is  that  which  has  to  do  with 
the  control  of  the  ideas  which  we  allow  to  come  into  the 
mind.  Ideative  habits  may  be  formed — are  formed,  in 
fact,  by  the  majority  of  persons.  We  may  cultivate  the 
habit  of  looking  on  the  bright  side  of  things ;  of  looking 
for  the  best  in  those  we  meet;  of  expecting  the  best 
things  instead  of  the  worst.  By  resolutely  refusing  to 
give  welcome  to  ideas  calculated  to  arouse  certain  emo- 
tions, feelings,  passions,  desires,  sentiments,  or  similar 
mental  states,  we  may  do  much  to  prevent  the  arousing 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      87 

of  the  emotion  itself.  Emotions  usually  are  called  forth 
by  some  idea,  and  if  we  shut  out  the  idea  we  may  pre- 
vent the  emotional  feeling  from  appearing.  In  this 
connection  the  universal  rule  of  psychology  may  be 
applied:  A  mental  state  may  be  inhibited  or  restrained 
by  turning  the  attention  to  the  opposite  mental  state. 

The  control  of  the  attention  is  really  the  control  of 
every  mental  state. 

We  may  use  the  will  in  the  direction  of  the  control 
of  the  attention — the  development  and  direction  of 
voluntary  attention — and  thus  actually  control  every 
phase  of  mental  activity.  The  will  is  nearest  to  the 
ego,  or  central  being  of  man,  and  the  attention  is  the 
chief  tool  and  instrument  of  the  will.  This  fact  cannot 
be  repeated  too  often.  If  it  is  impressed  upon  the  mind 
it  will  prove  to  be  useful  and  valuable  in  many  emer- 
gencies of  mental  life.  He  who  controls  his  attention 
controls  his  mind,  and  in  controlling  his  mind  controls 
himseK. 


CHAPTEE  XII. 

The   Instinctive  £motions» 

MAlsTY  attempts  to  classify  the  emotions  have 
been  made  by  the  psychologists,  but  the  best 
authorities  hold  that  beyond  the  purpose  of 
ordinary  convenience  in  considering  the  subject  any 
classification  is  scientifically  useless  by  reason  of  its 
incompleteness.  As  James  cleverly  puts  it:  ^^Any 
classification  of  the  emotions  is  seen  to  be  as  true  and 
as  natural  as  any  other,  if  it  only  serves  some  pur- 
pose/^ The  difficulty  attending  the  attempted  classifi- 
cation arises  from  the  fact  that  every  emotion  is  more 
or  less  complex,  and  is  made  up  of  various  feelings  and 
shades  of  emotional  excitement.  Each  emotion  blends 
into  others.  Just  as  a  few  elements  of  matter  may  be 
grouped  into  hundreds  of  thousands  of  combinations, 
so  the  elements  of  feeling  may  be  grouped  into  thou- 
sands of  shades  of  emotion.  It  is  said  that  the  two 
elements  of  carbon  and  hydrogen  form  combinations 
resulting  in  five  thousand  varieties  of  material  sub- 
stance, "from  anthracite  to  marsh  gas,  from  black  coke 
to  colorless  naphtha.^^  The  same  thing  may  be  said  of 
the  emotional  combinations  formed  from  two  principal 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      89 

elements  of  feeling.  Moreover,  the  close  distinction 
between  sensation  and  feeling  on  the  one  hand,  and 
between  feeling  and  emotion  on  the  other,  serves  to 
further  complicate  the  task. 

For  the  purposes  of  our  consideration,  let  us  divide 
the  emotions  into  five  general  classes,  as  follows:  (1) 
Instinctive  emotions,  (2)  social  emotions,  (3)  religious 
emotions,  (4)  agsthetic  emotions,  (5)  intellectual  emo- 
tions. We  shall  new  consider  each  of  the  above  five 
classes  in  turn. 

The  Instinctive  Emotions. 

Instinct  is  defined  as  ^^unconscious,  involuntary,  or 
unreasoning  prompting  to  any  action,^^  or  "the  natural 
unreasoning  impulse  by  which  an  animal  is  guided  to 
the  performance  of  any  action,  without  thought  of  im- 
proving the  method.^^  An  authority  says:  "Instinct 
is  a  natural  impulse  leading  animals,  even  prior  to  all 
experience,  to  perform  certain  actions  tending  to  the 
welfare  of  the  individual  or  the  perpetuation  of  the 
species,  apparently  without  understanding  the  object 
at  which  they  may  be  supposed  to  aim,  or  deliberating 
as  to  the  best  methods  to  employ.  In  many  cases,  as 
in  the  construction  of  the  cells  of  the  bee,  there  is  a 
perfection  about  the  result  which  reasoning  man  could 
not  have  equaled,  except  by  an  application  of  the  higher 


90      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

mathematics  to  direct  the  operations  carried  out.  Mr. 
Darwin  considers  that  animals,  in  time  past  as  now, 
have  varied  in  their  mental  qualities,  and  that  those 
variations  are  inherited.  Instincts  also  vary  slightly  in 
a  state  of  nature.  This  being  so,  natural  selection  can 
ultimately  bring  them  to  a  high  degree  of  perfection.^^ 

It  was  formerly  the  fashion  to  ascribe  instinct  in  the 
lower  animals,  and  in  man,  to  something  akin  to  "in- 
nate ideas'^  implanted  in  each  species  and  thereafter 
continued  by  inheritance.  But  the  application  of  the 
idea  of  evolution  to  the  science  of  psychology  has  re- 
sulted in  brushing  away  these  old  ideas.  To-day  it 
holds  that  that  which  we  call  "instinct^^  is  the  result 
of  gradual  development  in  the  course  of  evolution,  the 
accumulated  experience  of  the  race  being  stored  away 
in  the  race  memory,  each  individual  adding  a  little 
thereto  by  his  acquired  habits  and  experiences.  Psy- 
chologists now  hold  that  the  lower  forms  of  these  race 
tendencies  are  closely  akin  to  purely  reflex  actions,  and 
the  higher  forms,  which  are  known  as  "instinctive  emo- 
tions,^^  are  phenomena  of  the  subconscious  mind  result- 
ing from  race  memory  and  race  experience. 

Clodd  says:  "Instinct  is  the  higher  form  of  reflex 
action.  The  salmon  migrates  from  sea  to  river;  the 
bird  makes  its  nest  or  migrates  from  one  zone  to  an- 
other by  an  unvarying  route,  even  leaving  its  young 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      91 

behind  to  perish;  the  bee  builds  its  six-sided  cell;  the 
spider  spins  its  web;  the  chick  breaks  its  way  through 
the  shell,  balances  itself,  and  picks  up  grains  of  corn; 
the  newborn  babe  sucks  its  mother^s  breast — all  in 
virtue  of  like  acts  on  the  part  of  their  ancestors,  which, 
arising  in  the  needs  of  the  creature,  and  gradually  be- 
coming automatic,  have  not  varied  during  long  ages, 
the  tendency  to  repeat  them  being  transmitted  within 
the  germ  from  which  insect,  fish,  bird,  and  man  have 
severally  sprung/^ 

Schneider  says:  "It  is  a  fact  that  men,  especially 
in  childhood,  fear  to  go  into  a  dark  cavern,  or  a  gloomy 
wood.  This  feeling  of  fear  arises,  to  be  sure,  partly 
from  the  fact  that  we  easily  suspect  that  dangerous 
beasts  may  lurk  in  these  localities — a  suspicion  due  to 
stories  we  have  heard  and  read.  But,  on  the  other 
hand,  it  is  quite  sure  that  this  fear  at  a  certain  per- 
ception is  also  directly  inherited.  Children  who  have 
been  carefully  guarded  from  all  ghost  stories  are  never- 
theless terrified  and  cry  if  led  into  a  dark  place,  espe- 
cially if  sounds  are  made  there.  Even  an  adult  can 
easily  observe  that  an  uncomfortable  timidity  steals 
over  him  in  a  lonely  wood  at  night,  although  he  may 
have  the  fixed  conviction  that  not  the  slightest  danger 
is  near.  This  feeling  of  fear  occurs  in  many  men  even 
in  their  own  houses  after  dark,  although  it  is  much 


92      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

stronger  in  a  dark  cavern  or  forest.  The  fact  of  such 
instinctive  fear  is  easily  explicable  when  we  consider 
that  our  savage  ancestors  through  immemorable  genera- 
tions were  accustomed  to  meet  with  dangerous  beasts 
in  caverns^  especially  bears,  and  were  for  the  most  part 
attacked  by  such  beasts  during  the  night  and  in  the 
woods,  and  that  thus  an  inseparable  association  between 
the  perceptions  of  darkness,  caverns,  woods,  and  fear 
took  place,  and  was  inherited/^ 

James  says:  /^Nothing  is  commoner  than  the  re- 
mark that  man  differs  from  lower  creatures  by  the 
almost  total  absence  of  instincts,  and  the  assumption 
of  their  work  in  him  by  reason.  *  *  *  We  may  confi- 
dently say  that  however  uncertain  man's  reactions  upon 
his  environment  may  sometimes  seem  in  comparison 
with  those  of  the  lower  mammals,  the  uncertainty  is 
probably  not  due  to  their  possession  of  any  principles 
of  action  which  he  lacks.  On  the  contrary,  man  pos- 
sesses all  the  impulses  that  they  have,  and  a  great  many 
more  besides,  *  *  *  High  places  cause  fear  of  a  pe- 
culiarly sickening  sort,  though  here  again  individuals 
differ.  The  utterly  blind  instinctive  character  of  the 
motor  impulses  here  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  they  are 
almost  always  entirely  unreasonable,  but  that  reason  is 
powerless  to  suppress  them.  *  *  *  Certain  ideas  of 
supernatural  agency,  associated  with  real  circumstances, 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      93 

produce  a  peculiar  kind  of  horror.  This  horror  is  prob- 
ably explicable  as  the  result  of  a  combination  of  simple 
horrors.  To  bring  the  ghostly  terror  to  its  maximum, 
many  unusual  elements  of  the  dreadful  must  combine, 
such  as  loneliness,  darkness,  inexplicable  sounds,  espe- 
cially of  a  dismal  character,  moving  pictures  half  dis- 
cerned (or,  if  discerned,  of  dreadful  aspect),  and  a 
vertiginous  baffling  of  the  expectation.  *  *  *  In  view 
of  the  fact  that  cadaveric,  reptilian,  and  underground 
horrors  play  so  specific  and  constant  a  part  in  many 
nightmares  and  forms  of  delirium,  it  seems  not  alto- 
gether unwise  to  ask  whether  these  forms  of  dreadful 
circumstance  may  not  at  a  former  period  have  been 
more  normal  objects  of  the  environment  than  now. 
The  evolutionist  ought  to  have  no  difficulty  in  explain- 
ing these  terrors,  and  the  scenery  that  provokes  them, 
as  relapses  into  the  consciousness  of  the  cave  men,  a 
consciousness  usually  overlaid  in  us  by  experiences  of  a 
more  recent  date.'^ 

Instinctive  emotion  manifests  as  an  impulse  arising 
from  the  dim  recesses  of  the  feeling  or  emotional  na- 
ture— an  incentive  toward  a  dimly  conscious  end.  It 
differs  from  the  almost  purely  automatic  nature  of 
certain  forms  of  reflex  process,  for  its  beginning  is  a 
feeling  arising  from  the  subconscious  regions,  which 
strives  to  excite  an  activity  of  conscious  volition.     The 


94      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT, 

feeling  is  from  fhe  subconscious,  but  the  activity  is 
conscious.  The  end  may  not  be  perceived  in  conscious- 
ness, or  at  least  is  but  dimly  perceived,  but  the  action 
leading  to  the  end  is  in  full  consciousness.  Instinct 
is  seen  to  have  its  origin  in  the  past  experiences  of  the 
race,  transmitted  by  heredity  and  preserved  in  the  race 
memory.  It  has  for  its  object  the  preservation  of  the 
individual  and  of  the  species.  Its  end  is  often  some- 
thing far  removed  in  time  from  the  moment,  or  the 
welfare  of  the  species  rather  than  that  of  the  individual ; 
for  instance,  the  caterpillar  providing  for  its  future 
states,  or  the  bird  building  its  nest,  or  the  bees  building 
cells  and  providing  hone)^  for  their  successors,  for  very 
few  bees  live  to  partake  of  the  honey  which  they  have 
gathered  and  stored — they  are  animated  by  ^^the  spirit 
of  the  hive.*^ 

The  most  elementary  forms  of  the  instinctive  emo- 
tions are  those  which  have  to  do  with  the  preservation 
of  the  individual,  his  comfort,  and  personal  physical 
welfare.  This  class  of  emotions  comprises  what  are 
generally  known  as  purely  "selfish'^  feelings,  having 
little  or  no  concern  for  the  welfare  of  others.  In  this 
class  we  find  the  emotional  feelings  which  have  to  do 
with  the  satisfaction  of  hunger  and  thirst,  the  securing 
of  comfortable  quarters  and  warm  clothing,  and  the 
spirit  of  combat  and  strife  arising  from  the  desire  to 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      95 

obtain  these.  These  elemental  feelings  had  their  birth 
early  in  the  history  of  life,  and  indeed  life  itself  de- 
pended very  materially  upon  them  for  its  preservation 
and  continuance.  It  was  necessary  for  the  primitive 
living  thing  to  be  ^^selfish/^  When  man  appeared,  only 
those  survived  who  manifested  these  feelings  strongly; 
the  others  were  pushed  to  the  wall  and  perished.  Even 
in  our  civilization  the  man  below  the  average  in  this 
class  of  feelings  will  find  it  difficult  to  survive. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 
The  Passions^ 

A  RISING  from  the  most  elemental  instinctive 
/  \  emotions^  we  find  what  may  be  termed  "the 
*^  "^  passions/^  By  the  term  "passion'^  is  meant 
those  strong  feelings  in  which  the  elemental  selfish 
instincts  are  manifested  in  relation  to  other  persons, 
either  in  the  phase  of  attraction  or  repulsion.  In  this 
class  we  find  the  elementary  phases  of  love,  and  the 
feelings  of  hate,  anger,  jealousy,  revenge,  etc.  This 
class  of  emotions  usually  manifests  violently,  as  com- 
pared with  the  other  emotions.  The  passions  generally 
arise  from  self-preservation^  race  preservation  and  re- 
production, self-interest,  self-aggrandizement,  etc.,  and 
may  be  regarded  as  a  more  complex  phase  of  the  ele- 
mental instinctive  emotions.  The  elemental  instinctive 
emotions  of  self-preservation  and  self-comfort  cause  the 
individual  to  experience  and  manifest  the  passional 
emotions  of  desire  for  combat,  anger,  hate,  revenge,  etc., 
Avhile  the  instinctive  emotions  leading  to  reproduction 
and  continuance  of  the  race  give  rise  to  the  passional 
emotions  of  sexual  love,  jealousy,  etc.  The  desire  to 
attract  the  other  sex  increases  ambition,  vanity,  love  of 
display,  and  other  feelings. 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      97 

It  is  only  when  this  class  of  emotions  blends  with  the 
higher  emotions  that  the  passions  become  purified  and 
refined.  But  it  must  not  be  forgotten  that  these  emo- 
tions were  very  necessary  for  the  welfare  of  the  race 
in  the  early  stage  of  its  evolution,  and  that  they  still 
play  an  active  part  in  human  life,  under  the  greater  or 
less  restraint  imposed  by  civilized  society.  Nor  should 
it  be  forgotten  that  from  these  emotions  have  evolved 
the  highest  love  of  one  human  being  for  another.  From 
instinctive  sexual  love  and  the  ^^racial  instinct^^  have 
developed  the  higher  affection  of  man  for  woman,  and 
woman  for  man,  in  all  their  beautiful  manifestations — 
and  the  love  of  the  parent  for  the  child,  and  the  love 
of  the  child  for  the  parent.  The  first  manifestation 
of  altruism  arises  in  the  love  of  the  living  creature  for 
its  mate,  and  in  the  love  of  the  parents  for  their  off- 
spring. In  certain  forms  of  life  where  the  association 
of  the  sexes  is  merely  for  the  moment,  and  is  not  fol- 
lowed by  protection,  mutual  aid,  and  companionship, 
there  is  found  an  absence  of  mutual  affection  of  any 
kind,  the  only  feeling  being  an  elemental  reproductive 
instinct  bringing  the  male  and  female  together  for  the 
moment — an  almost  purely  reflex  activity.  In  the  same 
way,  in  the  cases  of  certain  animals  (the  rattlesnake, 
for  instance)  in  which  the  young  are  able  to  protect 
themselves  from  birth,  there  is  seen  a  total  absence  of 


98      YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

parental  affection  or  the  return  thereof.  Human  love 
between  the  sexes,  in  its  higher  and  lower  degrees,  is 
a  natural  evolution  from  passional  emotion  of  a  low 
order,  due  to  the  growth  of  social,  ethical,  moral,  and 
aesthetic  emotion  arising  from  the  necessities  of  the 
increasing  complexity  and  development  of  human  life. 
The  simpler  forms  of  passional  emotion  are  almost 
entirely  instinctive  in  their  manifestation.  Indeed,  in 
many  cases,  there  appears  to  be  but  little  more  than 
a  high  form  of  reflex  nervous  action.  The  following 
words  of  William  James  give  us  an  interesting  view  of 
this  fact  of  life:  ^^The  cat  runs  after  the  mouse,  runs 
or  shows  fight  before  the  dog,  avoids  falling  from  walls 
and  trees,  shuns  fire  and  water,  not  because  he  has  any 
notion  either  of  life  or  of  death  or  of  self-preservation. 
He  acts  in  each  case  separately  and  simply  because  he 
cannot  help  it;  being  so  framed  that  when  that  par- 
ticular running  thing  called  a  mouse  appears  in  his 
field  of  vision,  he  must  pursue;  that  when  that  partic- 
ular barking  and  obstreperous  thing  called  a  dog  ap- 
pears there,  he  must  retire  if  at  a  distance,  and  scratch 
if  close  by;  that  he  must  withdraw  his  feet  from  water, 
and  his  face  from  flame,  etc.  *  *  *  Now,  why  do  the 
various  animals  do  what  seem  to  us  such  strange  things 
in  the  presence  of  such  outlandish  stimuli?  Why  does 
the  hen,  for  instance,  submit  herself  to  the  tedium  of 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.      99 

incubating  such  a  fearfully  uninteresting  set  of  objects 
as  a  nestful  of  eggs,  unless  she  have  some  sort  of  pro- 
phetic inkling  of  the  result?  The  only  answer  is  ad 
hominem.  We  can  only  interpret  the  instinct  of  brutes 
by  what  we  know  of  instincts  in  ourselves.  Why  do 
men  always  lie  down,  when  they  can,  on  soft  beds  rather 
than  on  soft  floors?  Why  do  they  sit  around  a  stove 
on  a  cold  day?  Why,  in  a  room,  do  they  place  them- 
selves, ninety-nine  times  out  of  a  hundred,  with  their 
faces  toward  its  middle  rather  than  to  the  wall?  Why 
does  the  maiden  interest  the  youth  so  much  that  every- 
thing about  her  seems  more  important  and  significant 
than  anything  else  in  the  world?  Nothing  more  can 
be  said  than  that  these  are  human  ways,  and  that  every 
creature  likes  its  own  ways,  and  takes  to  following  them 
as  a  matter  of  course.  Science  may  come  and  consider 
these  ways,  and  find  that  most  of  them  are  useful.  But 
it  is  not  for  the  sake  of  their  utility  that  they  are 
followed,  but  because  at  the  moment  of  following  them 
we  feel  that  it  is  the  only  appropriate  and  natural  thing 
to  do.  Not  one  man  in  a  million,  when  taking  his 
dinner,  ever  thinks  of  its  utility.  He  eats  because  the 
food  tastes  good,  and  makes  him  want  more.  If  you 
should  ask  him  why  he  wants  to  eat  more  of  what  tastes 
like  that,  instead  of  revering  you  as  a  philosopher  he 
will  probably  laugh  at  you  for  a  fool.^^ 


100    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

James  continues :  ^^t  takes,  in  short,  what  Berkeley 
called  a  mind  debauched  by  learning  to  carry  the  proc- 
ess of  making  the  natural  seem  strange,  so  far  as  to 
ask  the  why  of  any  instinctive  human  act.  To  the 
metaphysician  alone  can  such  questions  arise  as :  Why 
do  we  smile  when  pleased  and  not  scowl?  Why  are  we 
unable  to  talk  to  a  crowd  as  to  a  single  friend?  Why 
does  a  particular  maiden  turn  our  wits  upside  down? 
The  common  man  can  only  say,  'Of  course  we  smile, 
of  course  our  heart  palpitates  at  the  sight  of  the  crowd, 
of  course  we  love  the  maiden — that  beautiful  soul  clad 
in  that  perfect  form,  so  palpably  and  flagrantly  made 
from  all  eternity  to  be  loved !'  And  so,  probably,  does 
each  animal  feel  about  the  particular  things  it  tends  to 
do  in  the  presence  of  particular  objects.  They,  too, 
are  a  priori  syntheses.  To  the  lion  it  is  the  lioness 
which  is  made  to  be  loved ;  to  the  bear,  the  she  bear.  To 
the  broody  hen  the  notion  would  seem  monstrous  that 
there  should  be  a  creature  in  the  world  to  whom  a  nest- 
ful  of  eggs  was  not  the  utterly  fascinating,  precious, 
and  never-to-be-too-much-sat-upon  object  which  it  is  to 
her.  Thus  we  may  be  sure  that  however  mysterious 
some  animals'  instincts  may  appear  to  us,  our  instincts 
will  appear  no  less  mysterious  to  them.  And  we  may 
conclude  that,  to  the  animal  which  obeys  it,  every  im- 
pulse and  every  step  of  that  instinct  shines  with  its  own 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    101 

sufficient  light,  and  seems  at  the  moment  the  only  ex- 
ternally right  and  proper  thing  to  do.  It  may  be  done 
for  its  own  sake  exclusively." 

One  has  very  little  need,  as  a  rule,  to  develop  the 
passional  emotions.  Instinct  has  taken  pretty  good 
care  that  we  shall  have  our  share  of  this  class  of  feel- 
ings. But  there  is  a  need  to  train,  restrain,  govern, 
and  control  these  emotions,  for  the  conditions  which 
brought  about  their  original  being  have  changed.  Our 
social  conventions  require  that  we  should  subordinate 
these  passional  feelings,  to  some  extent  at  least.  Soci- 
ety insists  that  we  must  restrict  our  love  impulses  to 
certain  limits  and  to  certain  quarters,  and  that  we  sub- 
due our  anger  and  hate,  except  toward  the  enemies  of 
our  land,  the  disturbers  of  public  peace,  and  the  men- 
acers  of  the  social  conventions  of  our  time  and  land. 
The  public  welfare  requires  that  we  inhibit  our  fighting 
impulses,  except  in  cases  of  self-defense  or  war.  Public 
policy  requires  that  we  keep  our  ambitions  within  rea- 
sonable limits,  which  limits  change  from  time  to  time, 
of  course.  In  short,  society  has  stepped  in  and  insisted 
that  man,  as  a  social  being,  must  not  only  acquire  a 
social  conscience  but  must  also  develop  sociable  emo- 
tions and  inhibit  his  unsociable  ones.  The  evolution 
of  man's  nature  has  caused  him  unconsciously  to  modify 
his  elemental,  instinctive,  passional  emotions,  and  sub- 


103     YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

ordinate  them  to  the  dictates  of  social,  ethical,  moral, 
and  aesthetic  feelings  and  ideals,  and  to  intellectual  con- 
siderations. Even  the  original  elemental  instincts  of 
the  lower  animals  have  been  modified  by  reason  of  the 
social  requirements  of  the  pack,  herd,  or  drove,  until 
the  modified  instinct  is  now  the  ruling  force. 

The  general  principles  of  emotional  control,  restraint^, 
and  mastery,  as  given  in  a  preceding  chapter,  are  ap- 
plicable to  the  particular  class  of  emotions  now  under 
consideration  here. 

(1)  By  refraining  from  the  physical 
expression,  one  may  at  least  partially  in- 
hibit the  emotion. 

(2)  By  refusing  to  create  the  habit, 
one  may  more  easily  manifest  control. 

(3)  By  refusing  to  dwell  upon  the  idea 
or  mental  picture  of  the  exciting  object, 
one  may  lessen  the  stimulus. 

(4)  By  cultivating  the  opposite  class 
of  emotions,  one  may  inhibit  any  class  of 
feeling. 

(5)  And,  finally,  by  acquiring  a  con- 
trol of  the  attention,  by  means  of  the  will, 
one  has  the  reins  firmly  in  hand,  and  may 
drive  or  hold  back  the  steeds  of  passion 
as  he  wills. 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    103 

The  passions  are  like  fiery  horses,  useful  if  well 
under  control,  but  most  dangerous  if  the  control  is  lost. 
The  ego  is  the  driver,  the  will  his  hands,  attention  the 
reins,  habit  the  bit,  and  the  passions  the  horses.  To 
drive  the  chariot  of  life  under  social  conditions,  the  ego 
must  have  strong  hands  (will)  to  tighten  or  loosen  the 
reins  of  attention.  He  must  also  employ  a  well  designed 
and  shaped  bit  of  habit.  Without  strong  hands,  good 
reins,  and  well-adjusted  bit,  the  fiery  steeds  of  passion 
may  gain  control  and,  running  away,  dash  the  chariot 
and  its  driver  over  the  precipice  and  on  to  the  jagged 
rocks  below. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 
The  Social  dnotions. 

A  S  man  became  a  social  animal  he  developed  new 
/  \  traits  of  character,  new  habits  of  action, 
-^  -^  new  ideals,  new  customs,  and  consequently  nev/ 
emotions.  Emotions  long  entertained  and  long  mani- 
fested by  the  race  become  more  or  less  instinctive,  and 
are  passed  along  in  the  form  of  either  (a)  inherited 
stimulus  akin  to,  but  lesser  in  degree  and  force  than,  the 
more  elemental  emotions;  or  (6)  of  inherited  tendency 
to  manifest  the  acquired  emotional  feeling  upon  the 
presentation  of  sufficiently  strong  stimuli.  Hence  arises 
that  which  we  have  called  "the  social  emotions/^ 

Under  the  classification  of  "the  social  emotions'^  are 
those  acquired  tendencies  of  action  and  feeling  of  the 
race  which  are  more  or  less  altruistic,  and  are  con- 
cerned with  the  welfare  of  others  and  one's  duties  and 
obligations  toward  society  and  our  fellow  men.  In  this 
class  are  found  the  emotions  which  impel  us  to  perform 
what  we  consider  or  feel  to  be  our  duty  toward  our 
neighbors,  and  our  obligations  and  duty  toward  the 
state,  as  expressed  in  its  laws,  the  customs  of  men  of 
our  country,  or  the  ideals  of  the  community.     In  an- 


YOUB  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    105 

other  phase  it  manifests  as  sympathy,  fellow  feeling, 
and  ^^kindness'^  in  general.  In  its  first  phase  we  find 
civic  virtue,  law-abiding  inclination,  honesty,  ^^sqiiare 
dealing,^^  and  patriotism;  in  its  second  phase  we  find 
sympathy  for  others,  charity,  mutual  aid,  the  allevia- 
tion of  poverty  and  suffering,  the  erection  of  asylums 
for  orphans  and  the  aged,  hospitals  for  the  sick,  and 
the  formation  of  societies  for  general  charitable  work. 

In  many  cases  we  find  the  social,  ethical,  and  moral 
emotions  closely  allied  with  religious  emotion,  and  by 
many  these  are  supposed  to  be  practically  identical,  but 
there  is  a  vast  difference  in  spite  of  their  frequent  asso- 
ciation. For  instance,  we  find  many  persons  of  high 
civic  virtue,  of  exalted  moral  ideals,  and  manifesting 
ethical  qualities  of  the  most  advanced  type,  who  are 
lacking  in  the  ordinary  religious  feelings.  On  the 
other  hand,  we  too  frequently  find  persons  professing 
great  religious  zeal,  and  apparently  experiencing  the 
most  intense  religious  emotional  feeling,  who  are  de- 
ficient in  social,  civic,  ethical,  and  moral  qualities,  in 
the  best  sense  of  these  terms.  The  aim  of  all  religion 
worthy  of  the  name,  however,  is  to  encourage  ethical 
and  moral  as  well  as  religious  emotions. 

We  must  here  make  the  distinction  between  those 
manifesting  the  actions  termed  ethical  and  moral  "be- 
cause they  feel  that  way,  and  those  who  merely  comply 


106     YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

with  the  conventionai  requirements  because  they  fear 
the  consequences  of  their  violation.  The  first  class  have 
the  true  social,  ethical,  and  moral  feelings,  tastes,  ideals, 
and  inclinations;  while  the  second  manifest  merely  the 
elementary  feelings  of  self-preservation  and  selfish  pru- 
dence. The  first  class  are  ^^good''  because  they  feel 
that  way  and  find  it  natural  to  be  so;  while  the  others 
are  ^^good"  merely  because  they  have  to  be  or  be  pun- 
ished by  legal  penalty  or  public  opinion,  loss  of  prestige, 
loss  of  financial  support,  etc. 

The  social,  moral,  and  ethical  emotions  are  believed 
to  have  arisen  in  the  race  by  reason  of  the  association 
of  individuals  in  communities  and  the  rise  of  the  neces- 
sity for  mutual  aid  and  forbearance.  Even  many  of  the 
species  of  the  lower  animals  have  social,  moral,  or  eth- 
ical codes  of  their  own,  based  on  the  experience  of  the 
species  or  family,  infractions  of  which  they  punish 
severely.  In  the  same  way  sympathy  and  the  altruistic 
feelings  are  supposed  to  have  arisen.  The  community 
of  interest  and  understanding  in  the  tribe,  family,  or 
clan  brought  not  only  the  feeling  of  natural  defense 
and  protection  but  also  the  finer,  inner  sympathetic 
feeling  of  the  pains  and  sufferings  of  their  associates. 
This,  in  the  progress  of  the  race,  has  developed  into 
broader  and  more  complex  ideals  and  feelings. 

Theology   explains   the   moral   feelings   as   resulting 


YOUR  MIND  AND  EOW  TO  USE  IT.    107 

from  conscience,  which  it  holds  to  be  a  special  faculty 
of  the  mind,  or  soul,  divinely  given.  Science,  while 
admitting  the  existence  of  the  state  of  feelings  which 
we  call  ^^conscience,^^  denies  its  supernatural  origin,  and 
ascribes  it  to  the  result  of  evolution,  heredity,  experi- 
ence, education,  and  suggestion.  Conscience,  according 
to  science,  is  a  compound  of  intellectual  and  emotional 
states.  Conscience  is  not  an  invariable  or  infallible 
guide,  but  depends  entirely  upon  the  heredity,  educa- 
tion, experience,  and  environment  of  the  individual. 
It  accompanies  the  moral  and  ethical  codes  of  the  race, 
which  vary  with  time  and  with  country.  Actions  which 
were  thought  right  a  century  ago  are  condemned  now; 
likewise,  things  condemned  a  century  ago  are  thought 
right  now.  What  is  commended  in  Turkey  is  con- 
demned in  England,  and  vice  versa.  Moral  tastes  and 
ideals,  like  aesthetic  ones,  vary  with  time  and  country. 
There  is  no  absolute  code  which  has  been  always  true, 
in  all  places.  There  is  an  evolution  in  the  ideals  of 
morals  and  ethics  as  in  everything  else,  and  "conscience'^ 
and  the  moral  and  ethical  emotions  accompany  the 
changing  ideals. 

Many  of  the  moral  and  ethical  principles  originally 
arose  from  necessity  or  utilitj^,  but  have  since  developed 
into  natural,  spontaneous  feeling  on  the  part  of  the 
race.     It  is  held  that  the  race  is  rapidly  developing  a 


108     YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

"'^social  conscience"  which  will  cause  the  wiping  out  of 
many  social  conditions  v/hich  are  now  the  disgrace  of 
civilization.  It  is  predicted  that  in  time  the  race  will 
look  back  upon  the  existence  of  poverty  in  our  civiliza- 
tion as  our  generation  now  looks  back  upon  the  existence 
of  slavery^  imprisonment  for  debt,  capital  punishment 
for  the  theft  of  a  loaf  of  bread,  the  killing  of  prisoners 
of  war,  etc.  It  is  thought  that,  in  time,  wars  of  con- 
quest will  be  deemed  as  utterly  immoral  as  to-day  is 
regarded  the  murder  of  a  body  of  men  by  a  band  of 
pirates  or  bandits.  In  the  same  way  the  economic  slav- 
ery of  to-day  will  be  seen  as  immoral  as  now  seems  the 
physical  slavery  of  the  past.  In  not  far  distant  time 
it  will  seem  incredible  that  society  could  have  ever 
allowed  one  of  its  members  to  die  of  hunger  in  the 
streets,  or  of  poverty  and  inattention  in  the  sick  room 
of  the  hovel.  Not  only  will  the  ideals  and  feelings  of 
ethical  and  moral  responsibility  change  and  evolve,  but 
the  feelings  of  personal  sympathy  will  evolve  in  accord- 
ance therewith.  At  least  such  is  the  dream  and  proph- 
ecy of  some  of  the  world's  greatest  thinkers. 

The  social,  ethical,  and  moral  emotions  may  be  devel- 
oped by  a  study  of  the  evolution  and  meaning  of  society 
on  the  one  hand,  and  the  perception  of  the  condition  of 
the  lives  of  less  fortunate  individuals  on  the  other.  The 
first  will  awaken  new  ideas   of   the  history  and  real 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT,    109 

meaning  of  social  association  and  mutual  intercourse, 
and  will  develop  a  new  sense  of  responsibility,  duty, 
and  civic  and  social  pride.  The  second  will  awaken 
understanding  and  sympathy,  and  a  desire  to  do  what 
one  can  to  help  those  who  are  ^^the  under  dog,^^  and 
also  to  bring  about  a  better  state  of  affairs  in  general. 
The  study  of  history  and  civilization,  of  sociology  and 
civics,  will  do  much  in  the  first  direction.  The  study 
of  human-kind,  and  its  life  problems  and  condition, 
will  do  the  same  in  the  second  case.  In  both  cases 
there  will  be  awakened  a  new  sense  of  ^^right  and 
wrong'^ — a  new  conception  of  ^^ought  and  ought  not^^ — 
regarding  one's  relations  to  the  race,  society,  and  his 
fellow  beings. 

Let  no  one  deceive  himself  or  herself  by  the  smug 
assumption  that  the  race  has  entirely  emerged  from 
barbarism  and  is  now  on  the  top  wave  of  civilization. 
The  truth,  as  known  to  all  careful  and  conscientious 
thinkers,  is  that  we  are  but  half  civilized,  if,  indeed, 
that  much.  Many  of  our  customs  and  conventions  are 
those  of  a  half-barbarous  people.  Our  ideals  are  low, 
our  customs  often  vile.  We  lack  not  only  high  ideals 
but  in  many  cases  we  show  a  lack  of  sanity  in  our 
social  conventions.  But  evolution  is  moving  us  slowly 
ahead.  A  better  day  is  dawning.  The  signs  are  in  the 
air,  to  be  seen  by  all  thoughtful  men.     Civilization  is 


no    YOUB  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT, 

climbing  the  ladder,  aided  by  the  evolution  of  the 
social,  ethical,  and  moral  emotions  and  the  development 
of  the  intellect. 

In  connection  with  this  phase  of  the  emotions,  we 
invite  the  student  to  consider  the  following  excellent 
words  of  Professor  Davidson  in  his  ^^History  of  Greek 
Education":  ^^It  is  not  enough  for  a  man  to  under- 
stand the  conditions  of  rational  life  in  his  own  time. 
He  must  likewise  love  these  conditions  and  hate  what- 
ever leads  to  life  of  an  opposite  kind.  This  is  only 
another  way  of  saying  that  he  must  love  the  good  and 
hate  the  evil;  for  the  good  is  simply  what  conduces  to 
rational  or  moral  life,  and  the  evil  simply  what  leads 
away  from  it.  It  is  perfectly  obvious,  as  soon  as  it  is 
pointed  out,  that  all  immoral  life  is  due  to  a  false 
distribution  of  affection,  which  again  is  often,  though 
by  no  means  always,  due  to  a  want  of  intellectual  cul- 
tivation. He  that  attributes  to  anything  a  value  greater 
or  less  than  it  really  possesses,  in  the  order  of  things, 
has  already  placed  himself  in  a  false  relation  to  it,  and 
will  certainly,  when  he  comes  to  act  with  reference  to 
it,  act  immorally .^^ 


CHAPTER  XV. 
The  Religious  Amotions. 

BY  ^^the  religious  emotions''  is  meant  that  class 
of  emotional  feeling  arising  from  the  faith  and 
belief  in,  or  consciousness  of  the  presence  of, 
supernatural  beings,  powers,  entities,  or  forces.  This 
form  of  emotion  is  regarded  as  distinct  from  the  ethical 
and  moral  emotions,  although  frequently  found  in  con- 
nection therewith.  Likewise,  it  is  independent  of  any- 
special  form  of  intellectual  belief,  for  it  is  far  more 
fundamental  and  often  exists  without  creed,  philosophy, 
or  stated  belief,  the  only  manifestation  in  such  cases 
being  a  ^^feeling''  of  the  existence  of  supernatural  be- 
ings, forces,  and  powers  to  which  man  has  a  relation 
and  to  which  he  owes  obedience.  To  those  who  may 
think  that  this  is  too  narrow  a  conception  of  religious 
emotion  we  refer  the  following  definition  of  ^^religion'' 
from  the  dictionaries:  ^^The  acts  or  feelings  which 
result  from  the  belief  of  a  god,  or  gods,  having  superior 
control  over  matter,  life,  or  destiny.  Eeligion  is  sub- 
jective, designating  the  feelings  and  acts  of  men  which 
relate  to  God;  theology  is  objective,  denoting  the  science 
which  investigates  the  existence,  laws,  and  attributes 


112     YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT, 

of  God;'^  or  (objectively)  ^^the  outer  form  and  embodi- 
ment which  the  inward  spirit  of  a  true  or  a  false  devo- 
tion assumes/'  (subjectively)  ^^the  feeling  of  veneration 
with  which  the  worshiper  regards  the  Being  he  adores.'^ 

Darwin^  in  his  *^^Descent  of  Man/'  says  that  the 
feeling  of  religious  devotion  is  a  highly  complex  one, 
consisting  of  love,  complete  submission  to  an  exalted 
and  mysterious  superior,  a  strong  sense  of  dependence, 
fear,  reverence,  gratitude,  hope  for  the  future,  and 
perhaps  other  elements.  He  is  of  the  opinion  that  no 
man  can  experience  so  complex  an  emotion  until  ad- 
vanced in  his  intellectual  and  moral  faculties  to  at  least 
a  moderately  high  level.  The  authorities  generally 
agree  with  Darwin,  although  the  more  recent  study  of 
the  history  of  religion  has  shown  that  religious  feeling 
has  a  far  more  primitive  origin  than  that  indicated  by 
Darwin. 

It  is  true  that  the  lower  animals  are  not  deemed 
capable  of  anything  approaching  religious  feeling,  un- 
less there  is  a  feeling  approaching  it  in  the  attitude  of 
the  dog  and  horse  and  other  domestic  animals  toward 
their  masters.  But  man,  as  soon  as  he  is  able  to 
attribute  natural  phenomena  to  a  supernatural  cause 
and  power,  manifests  a  crude  religious  feeling  and 
emotion.  He  begins  by  believing  in,  fearing,  and  wor- 
shiping natural  forces  and  objects,  such  as  the  sun,  the 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    113 

moon,  the  wind,  thunder  and  lightning,  the  ocean,  riv- 
ers, mountains,  etc.  It  is  claimed  that  there  is  no 
natural  object  that  has  not  been  deified  and  worshiped 
by  some  people  at  some  time  in  the  history  of  the  race. 
Later,  man  acquired  the  anthropomorphic  conception 
of  deities  and  created  many  gods  in  his  own  image, 
endowing  them  with  his  own  attributes,  qualities,  and 
characteristics.  The  mental  characteristics  and  morals 
of  a  people  can  always  be  ascertained  by  a  knowledge 
of  the  average  conception  of  deity  held  by  them.  Poly- 
theism, or  the  belief  in  many  gods,  was  succeeded  by 
monotheism,  or  belief  in  one  god. 

Monotheism  ranges  from  the  crudest  conception  of 
a  manlike  god  to  the  highest  conception  of  a  spiritual 
Being  transcending  all  human  qualities,  attributes,  or 
characteristics.  Man  began  by  believing  in  many  god 
things,  then  in  many  god  persons,  then  in  a  one  god- 
person,  then  in  one  God  who  is  a  spirit,  then  in  One 
Universal  Spirit  which  is  God.  It  is  a  far  cry  from  the 
savage,  manlike  god  of  old  to  the  conception  of  the 
Universal  Spirit  of  the  ^^God-drunken  philosopher,^^ 
Spinoza.  The  extreme  of  religious  belief  is  that  which 
holds  that  ^^there  is  nothing  but  God — all  else  is  illu- 
sion,^' of  pantheistic  idealism.  Buddhism  (at  least  in 
its  original  form)  discarded  the  idea  of  a  Supreme 
Being,  and  held  that  Ultimate  Reality  is  but  Universal 


114    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

Law;  hence  the  accusation  that  Buddhism  is  an  ^^athe- 
istic religion/^  although  it  is  one  of  the  world's  greatest 
religions^  having  over  400^000,000  followers. 

But  the  beliefs  of  the  religious  person  may  he  con- 
sidered as  resulting  from  intellectual  processes;  his 
religious  feelings  and  emotions  arise  from  another  part 
of  his  mental  being.  It  is  the  testimony  of  the  author- 
ities of  all  religions  that  religious  conviction  is  an  inner 
experience  rather  than  an  intellectual  conception.  The 
emotional  element  is  always  active  in  religious  mani- 
festations everywhere.  The  purely  intellectual  religion 
is  naught  but  a  philosophy.  Eeligion  without  feeling 
and  emotion  is  an  anomaly.  In  all  true  religion  there 
exists  a  feeling  of  inner  assurance  and  faith,  love,  awe, 
dependence,  submission,  reverence,  gratitude,  hope,  and 
perhaps  fear.  The  emotional  element  must  always  be 
present,  not  necessarily  in  the  form  of  emotional  excess, 
as  in  the  case  of  revival  hysteria  or  the  dance  of  the 
whirling  dervishes,  but  at  least  in  the  form  of  the  calm, 
fervent  feeling  of  ^^that  peace  which  passeth  under- 
standing.^'  When  religion  departs  from  the  emotional 
phase  it  becomes  merely  a  ^"^school  of  philosophy,^'  or  an 
^^ethical  culture  society.'' 

The  student  must  not  lose  sight  of  the  uplifting 
influence  of  true  religious  emotion  by  reason  of  his 
knowledge  of  its  lowly  origin.     Like  the  lotus,  which 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  U8E  IT.     115 

has  its  roots  in  the  slimy^  filthy  mud  of  the  river,  and 
its  stem  in  the  muddy,  stagnant,  and  foul  waters  thereof, 
but  its  beautiful  flower  unfolded  in  the  clear  air  and 
facing  the  sun,  so  is  religious  feeling  responsible  for 
some  of  the  most  beautiful  and  uplifting  ideals  and 
actions  of  the  race.  If  its  origin  and  history  contain 
much  that  is  not  consistent  with  the  highest  ideals  of 
the  race  to-day,  it  is  not  the  fault  of  religion  but  of 
the  race  itself.  Eeligion,  like  all  else  in  the  universal 
manifestation,  is  under  the  laws  of  evolution,  growth, 
and  development.  What  the  religion  of  the  future  may 
be,  we  know  not.  But  the  prophets  of  the  race  are 
dreaming  visions  of  a  religion  as  much  higher  than  that 
of  to-day  as  the  latter  is  higher  than  the  crude  fetich- 
ism  of  the  savage. 

The  following  quotation  from  John  Fiske's  ^^Through 
Nature  to  God''  is  appropriate  in  this  place.  Fiske 
says:  ^^My  aim  is  to  show  that  ^that  other  influence,' 
that  inward  conviction,  the  craving  for  a  final  cause, 
the  theistic  assumption,  is  itself  one  of  the  master  facts 
of  the  universe,  and  as  much  entitled  to  respect  as  any 
fact  in  physical  nature  can  possibly  be.  The  argument 
flashed  upon  me  about  ten  years  ago  while  reading 
Herbert  Spencer's  controversy  with  Frederic  Harrison 
concerning  the  nature  and  reality  of  religion.  Because 
Spencer  derived  historically  the  greater  part  of  modern 


116     YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

belief  in  an  Unseen  World  from  the  savage's  primeval 
world  of  dreams  and  ghosts,  some  of  his  critics  main- 
tained that  logical  consistency  required  him  to  dismiss 
the  modern  belief  as  utterly  false;  otherwise  he  would 
be  guilty  of  seeking  to  evolve  truth  from  falsehood. 
^By  no  means/  replied  Spencer.  ^Contrariwise,  the  ul- 
timate form  of  the  religious  consciousness  is  the  final 
development  of  a  consciousness  which  at  the  outset 
contained  a  germ  of  truth  obscured  by  multitudinous 
errors.^  '^  Fiske,  in  this  connection,  quotes  the  Tenny- 
sonian  question: — 

^^  ^Who  forged  that  other  influence, 
That  heat  of  inward  evidence. 
By  which  he  doubts  against  the  sense  ?'  ^' 

The  religious  emotions  may  be  developed  by  allowing 
the  mind  to  dwell  upon  the  Power  underlying  the 
universe  of  fleeting,  changing  forms;  by  reading  prose 
and  poetry  in  which  an  appeal  is  made  to  the  religious 
instinct;  by  listening  to  music  which  awakens  the  emo- 
tion of  reverence  and  awe;  and,  finally,  by  meditating 
upon  the  inner  spirit  immanent  in  every  living  being. 
As  an  old  Hindu  sage  once  said:  ^^There  are  many 
paths  by  which  men  arrive  at  a  knowledge  of  the  pres- 
ence of  God,  but  there  is  but  one  goal  and  destination.'' 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

The  Aesthetic  Cmotions. 

BY  ^^the  aesthetic  emotions'^  is  meant  those  emo- 
tional feelings  which  are  concerned  with  the 
perception  of  beauty  or  taste,  and  by  reason  of 
which  we  ^^like'^  or  "dislike''  certain  perceptions  of 
sensory  impressions.  In  order  to  get  a  clearer  idea,  let 
us  consider  what  is  meant  by  "beauty'^  and  "taste/^ 

"Beauty'^  is  defined  as  "that  quality  or  assemblage 
of  qualities  in  an  object  which  gives  the  eye  or  the  ear 
intense  pleasure;  or  that  characteristic  in  an  object 
which  gratifies  the  intellect  or  moral  feeling.'^  "Taste" 
(in  this  sense  of  the  term)  is  defined  as  "nice  percep- 
tion, or  the  power  of  perceiving  and  relishing  excellence 
in  human  performances;  the  power  of  appreciating  the 
finer  qualities  of  art;  the  faculty  of  discerning  beauty, 
order,  congruity,  proportion,  symmetry,  or  whatever 
constitutes  excellence,  particularly  in  the  fine  arts  or 
literature;  the  faculty  of  the  mind  by  which  we  both 
perceive  and  enjoy  whatever  is  beautiful  or  sublime 
in  the  works  of  nature  and  art.  The  possession  of 
taste  insures  grace  and  beauty  in  the  works  of  an  artist, 
and  the  avoidance  of  all  that  is  low  or  mean.     It  is  as 


118    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

often  the  result  of  an  innate  sense  of  beauty  or  pro- 
priety as  of  art  education,  and  no  genius  can  com- 
pensate for  the  want  of  it.  *  *  *  Tastes  differ  so  much 
among  individuals,  nations,  or  in  different  ages  and 
conditions  of  civilization  that  it  is  utterly  impossible 
to  set  up  a  standard  of  taste  applicable  to  all  men  and 
to  all  stages  in  the  evolution  of  society/^ 

The  aesthetic  sense,  feeling,  and  emotion  are  products 
of  the  later  stages  of  the  evolution  of  the  mind  of  man. 
Their  roots,  however,  may  be  seen  in  the  crude  attempts 
at  decoration  and  adornment  in  the  savage,  and  still 
further  back  in  the  tendency  of  certain  birds  to  adorn 
their  nests  or  ^'^bowers.^^  Moreover,  some  sense  of  beauty 
must  exist  in  the  lower  animals,  which  are  influenced 
thereby  in  the  selection  of  their  mates,  the  bright  plum- 
age of  the  birds,  and  the  coloring  of  the  insects  and 
higher  animals  evidencing  the  existence  of  at  least  a 
primitive  aesthetic  sense.  Herbert  Spencer  says  that 
one  characteristic  of  the  aesthetic  feelings  is  that  they 
are  separated  from  the  functions  vitally  requisite  and 
necessary  to  sustain  life,  and  it  is  not  until  the  latter 
are  reasonably  well  satisfied  that  the  former  begin  to 
manifest  in  force. 

The  authorities  hold  that  the  basic  element  concerned 
in  the  manifestation  of  the  aesthetic  emotional  feeling 
is  the  sensory  element,  which  consists  of  the  pleasure 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    119 

arising  from  the  perception  of  objects  of  vision  or  hear- 
ing which  are  deemed  beautiful.  There  is  a  certain 
nervous  satisfaction  which  arises  from  the  perception 
of  the  sensation  of  the  sight  of  a  beautiful  thing,  or  of 
the  hearing  of  beautiful  sound.  Just  why  certain  sights 
prove  agreeable  and  others  disagreeable,  or  certain 
sounds  pleasant  and  others  unpleasant,  is  very  difficult 
to  determine.  Association  and  habit  may  have  some- 
thing to  do  with  the  beauty  of  sight  object,  and  there 
may  be  natural  harmony  of  vibration  in  colors  as  there 
is  in  sound.  In  the  case  of  sounds  there  is  undoubtedly 
a  natural  harmony  between  the  vibrations  of  certain 
notes  of  the  scale  and  inharmony  between  others.  Some 
have  held  that  the  secret  of  the  enjoyment  of  music  is 
found  in  the  natural  appreciation  of  rhythm,  as  rhythm 
is  a  cosmic  manifestation  evident  in  everything  from 
great  to  small.  But  these  theories  do  not  account  for 
the  differences  existing  in  the  tastes  regarding  color 
and  music  manifested  by  different  individuals,  races, 
and  classes  of  people. 

Grant  Allen  says:  "The  vulgar  are  pleased  with 
great  masses  of  color,  especially  red,  orange,  and  purple, 
which  give  their  coarse,  nervous  organization  the  requi- 
site stimulus.  The  refined,  with  nerves  of  less  caliber, 
but  greater  discriminativeness,  require  delicate  com- 
binations of  complementaries  and  prefer  neutral  tints 


120    YOUn  MIND  AND  BOW  TO  USE  IT. 

to  the  glare  of  the  primary  hues.  Children  and  savages 
love  to  dress  in  all  the  colors  of  the  rainbow/^  In  the 
same  way  persons  of  certain  types  of  taste  are  pleased 
with  ^^rag  time''  and  cheap^  rollicking  songs  or  dances, 
while  others  shudder  at  these  and  find  delight  in  the 
classic  productions  of  the  great  composers. 

There  is  also  the  intellectual  element  to  be  reckoned 
with  in  the  aesthetic  emotions.  The  intellect  must  dis- 
cover the  beauty  in  certain  objects  before  the  emotion  is 
aroused  by  the  perception.  Halleck  says :  "Every  time 
the  mind  discerns  unity  amid  variety,  order,  rhythm, 
proportion,  or  symmetry,  an  aesthetic  emotion  arises. 
*  *  *  The  traveler  with  a  trained  intellect  will  see  far 
more  beauty  than  an  ignorant  one.  In  looking  at  a 
cathedral,  a  large  part  of  the  aesthetic  enjoyment  comes 
from  tracing  out  the  symmetry,  from  comparing  part 
with  part.  Not  until  this  process  is  complete  will  the 
full  beauty  of  the  structure  as  a  whole  be  perceived. 
If  the  traveler  knows  something  of  mediaeval  architec- 
ture before  starting  on  his  European  trip,  he  will  see 
far  more  beauty.  The  opposite  of  the  aesthetic,  which 
we  call  the  ugly,  is  the  unsymmetrical,  the  disorderly — 
that  in  which  we'  can  discover  no  rhythm,  plan,  or 
beauty.'' 

The  element  of  associative  suggestion  also  enters  into 
the  manifestation  of  aesthetic  emotional  feeling.     The 


YOVB  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    121 

mind  accepts  the  suggestion  of  the  beauty  of  certain 
styles  of  art,  or  the  excellence  of  certain  classes  of  music. 
There  are  fashions  in  art  and  music,  as  in  clothes,  and 
what  is  thought  beautiful  to-day  may  be  deemed  hide- 
ous to-morrow.  This  is  not  entirely  due  to  the  evolu- 
tion of  taste,  for  in  many  cases  the  old  fashions  are 
revived  and  again  deemed  beautiful.  There  is,  more- 
over, the  effect  of  the  association  of  the  object  of  emo- 
tion with  certain  events  or  persons.  This  association 
renders  the  thing  popular,  and  therefore  agreeable  and 
beautiful  for  the  time  being.  The  suggestion  in  a  story 
will  often  cause  the  beauty  of  a  certain  scene,  or  the 
harmony  of  a  certain  piece  of  music,  to  dawn  upon 
thousands  of  persons.  Some  noted  person  sets  the  seal 
of  approval  upon  a  certain  picture  or  musical  composi- 
tion and  lo !  the  multitude  calls  it  beautiful.  It  must 
not  be  supposed,  however,  that  the  crowd  always  coun- 
terfeits this  sense  of  beauty  and  excellence  which  has 
been  suggested  to  it.  On  the  contrary,  genuine  aesthetic 
feeling  often  results  from  the  discovery  so  made. 

There  is  style  and  fashion  in  the  use  of  words,  result- 
ing from  fashion,  which  gives  rise  to  aesthetic  feelings 
regarding  them.  These  feelings  do"  not  arise  from  the 
consideration  of  the  nature  of  the  object  expressed  by 
the  word ;  of  two  words  designating  the  same  thing,  one 
causes  disgust  and  the  other  at  least  passive  tolerance. 


123     YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

For  instance,  in  speaking  of  the  sensible  moisture  which 
is  emitted  from  the  pores  of  the  skin,  we  may  use  either 
of  the  respective  terms  ^^sweat'^  or  ^^perspiration/^  Both 
mean  the  same  thing,  and  have  an  equally  respectable 
origin.  But  to  many  persons  the  word  ^Weaf^  causes 
unpleasant  aesthetic  emotion,  while  the  word  ^^perspira- 
tion'^  is  accepted  without  remonstrance.  Some  persons 
abhor  the  term  ^Sdctuals,"  while  ^^viands''  or  "food'^ 
are  accepted  without  protest.  There  is  often  an  un- 
pleasant, low,  vulgar  association  connected  with  some 
words  which  accounts  for  the  disfavor  with  which  they 
are  received,  and  which  association  is  absent  from  the 
more  ^^polite"  terms  employed  to  indicate  the  same 
thing.  But  in  other  cases  there  is  nothing  but  the 
simple  suggestion  of  fashion  and  style  to  account  for 
the  aesthetic  acceptance  or  rejection. 

It  is  possible  that  some  psychologist  of  the  future  will 
establish  the  truth  of  the  theory  now  tentatively  ad- 
vanced by  a  few  investigators,  namely,  that  taste  and 
the  sense  of  beauty  depend  almost  entirely  upon  the 
element  of  suggestion,  manifested  as  association,  influ- 
ence of  authority,  habit,  fashion,  imitation,  etc.  It  is 
known  that  the  emotional  nature  is  peculiarly  liable  to 
suggestion,  and  that  tastes  may  be  created  or  destroyed 
by  repeated  suggestion  under  the  most  favorable  cir- 
cumstances.    It  is  thought  likely  that  if  we  could  trace 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    123 

back  to  its  roots  every  emotion  of  taste,  we  would  find 
it  arising  from  some  associative,  suggestive  influence 
connected  with  another  and  more  elemental  class  of 
emotions. 

Eegarding  the  fact  that  there  is  no  universal  stand- 
ard of  taste  or  beauty,  Halleck  says:  ^^It  has  been 
said  that  aesthetics  cannot  be  treated  in  a  scientific  way 
because  there  is  no  standard  of  taste.  ^De  gustibus  non 
est  disputandumf  (^there  is  no  disputing  about  tastes') 
is  an  old  proverb.  Of  two  equally  intelligent  persons, 
the  one  may  like  a  certain  book,  the  other  dislike  it. 
*  *  *  While  it  is  true  that  the  standard  of  taste  is  a 
varying  one  within  certain  limits,  it  is  no  more  so  than 
that  of  morals.  As  men's  nervous  systems,  education, 
and  associations  differ,  we  may  scientifically  conclude 
that  their  tastes  must  differ.  The  greater  the  uniform- 
ity in  the  factors  the  less  does  the  product  vary.  On 
the  other  hand,  within  certain  limits,  the  standard  of 
sesthetics  is  relatively  uniform.  It  is  fixed  by  the  ma- 
jority of  intelligent  people  of  any  age  and  country.  To 
estimate  the  standard  by  which  to  judge  of  the  correct- 
ness of  language  or  of  the  literary  taste  of  any  era,  we 
examine  the  conversations  of  the  best  speakers,  the 
works  of  the  standard  writers.^' 

The  aesthetic  emotions  may  be  developed  and  culti- 
vated by  exercise  and  practice,  and  particularly  by  asso- 


124    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

elation  and  familiarity  with  beautiful  things,  and  with 
those  who  have  ^^good  taste/'  Appreciation  of  beauty 
is  more  or  less  contagious,  up  to  a  certain  point  of 
development,  at  least,  and  if  one  wishes  to  recognize, 
understand,  and  appreciate  beauty,  he  should  go  where 
beauty  is,  and  where  its  votaries  are  gathered.  The 
study  of  standard  works  of  art,  or  objects  of  nature,  or 
the  best  productions  of  the  composers  of  music,  will  do 
much  to  develop  and  unfold  one's  higher  aesthetic  feel- 
ings and  understanding. 

It  is  claimed  by  some  of  the  best  authorities  that  to 
develop  the  finer  and  higher  aesthetic  feelings  and  un- 
derstanding we  must  learn  to  find  beauty  and  excellence 
in  things  removed  from  ourselves  or  our  selfish  inter- 
ests. The  narrow,  selfish  emotions  kill  the  aesthetic 
feelings — the  two  cannot  exist  together.  The  person 
whose  thoughts  are  centered  on  himself  or  herself  very 
rarely  finds  beauty  or  excellence  in  works  of  art  or 
music.  Grant  Allen  well  sums  up  the  subject  in  the 
following  words :  ''Oood  taste  is  the  progressive  product 
of  progressing  fineness  and  discrimination  in  the  nerves, 
educated  attention,  high  and  7iohle  emotional  constitu- 
tion, and  increasing  intellectual  faculties/^ 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

The  Intellectual  Amotions. 

BY  ^^the  intellectual  emotions'^  is  meant  that  class 
of  emotional  feeling  resulting  from  the  pres- 
ence of  objects  of  intellectual  interest.  This 
class  of  emotions  depends  for  its  satisfaction  upon  the 
exercise  of  the  intellectual  faculties,  from  the  most 
simple  to  the  most  complex,  and  including  perception, 
memory,  imagination,  reason,  judgment,  and  all  the 
logical  faculties.  Those  who  are  accustomed  to  employ- 
ing the  mind  through  voluntary  attention,  particularly 
in  the  direction  of  creative  ideation  or  constructive 
imagination,  experience  these  emotions  to  a  greater  or 
less  degree. 

The  exercise  of  perception,  if  we  are  skilled  therein, 
gives  us  a  pleasurable  feeling,  and  if  we  succeed  in  mak- 
ing an  interesting  or  important  discovery  by  reason 
thereof,  we  experience  a  strong  degree  of  emotional 
satisfaction.  Likewise,  we  experience  agreeable  feelings 
when  we  are  able  to  remember  distinctly  something 
which  might  well  have  been  forgotten,  or  when  we  suc- 
ceed in  recalling  something  which  had  escaped  our 
memory  for  the  moment.     In  the  same  way  the  exercise 


126     YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

of  the  imagination  is  a  source  of  great  pleasure  in  many 
cases  in  the  direction  of  writing,  planning,  inventing, 
or  other  creative  processes,  or  even  in  the  building  of 
air  castles.  The  exercise  of  the  logical  faculties  gives 
great  pleasure  to  those  in  whom  these  faculties  are  well 
developed. 

Halleck  well  says:  ^There  was  probably  not  a  hap- 
pier moment  in  Newton^s  life  than  when  he  had  suc- 
ceeded in  demonstrating  that  the  same  power  which 
caused  the  apple  to  fall  held  the  moon  and  the  planets 
in  their  orbits.  When  Watts  discovered  that  steam 
might  be  harnessed  like  a  horse,  when  an  inventor  suc- 
ceeds in  perfecting  a  labor-lightening  device,  whenever 
an  obscurity  is  cleared  away,  the  reason  for  a  thing 
understood,  and  a  baffling  instance  brought  under  a 
general  law,  intellectual  emotion  results.^' 

The  pleasurable  feelings  we  experience  upon  the  read- 
ing of  a  good  book,  or  the  discovery  of  real  poetry,  are 
forms  of  intellectual  emotion.  The  same  class  of  emo- 
tional feeling  is  aroused  when  we  witness  a  good  play. 
Among  other  instances  of  this  class  we  mention  the 
perception  of  clever  work  of  any  kind,  intricate  machin- 
ery, ingenious  devices,  helpful  improvements,  or  other 
works  of  man  which  indicate  the  existence  of  thought 
and  inventive  ability  in  the  designer  or  builder.  To 
appreciate  mental  work  of  this  kind  we  must  bring  a 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    127 

mind  developed  along  the  same  or  similar  lines.  It  has 
well  been  said  that  before  one  can  take  away  anything 
from  a  book  he  must  bring  something  to  it.  It  takes 
mentality  to  recognize  and  appreciate  mentality  or  the 
work  of  mentality. 

The  study  of  scientific  subjects  is  a  source  of  great 
pleasure  to  those  who  are  inclined  to  such  pursuits. 
To  the  scientific  mind  the  study  of  the  latest  work  on 
the  favorite  branch  gives  a  joy  which  nothing  else  is 
capable  of  arousing.  To  the  philosopher  the  works  of 
other  philosophers  of  the  same  school  give  intense  satis- 
faction. 

It  is  claimed  that  the  sense  of  humor  and  wit  is  an 
intellectual  emotion,  for  it  depends  upon  the  detection 
of  the  ludicrous  features  of  a  happening.  Certain  psy- 
chologists have  held  that  the  distinctive  element  of 
humor  is  the  feeling  attendant  upon  the  perception  of 
incongruity ;  while  that  of  wit  is  the  feeling  of  superior- 
ity on  the  part  of  the  witty  person,  and  the  correspond- 
ing chagrin  of  the  object  of  his  wit.  It  would  seem, 
however,  that  the  appreciation  of  wit  must  depend  upon 
the  intellectual  perception  of  cleverness  of  expression 
and  the  pleasure  resulting  from  the  discovery  thereof, 
and  that  the  feeling  of  humor  is  aroused  principally  by 
reason  of  the  incongruous  element;  the  feeling  of  self- 
satisfaction  as  contrasted  with  the  discomfiture  of  the 


128       YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

other  person  belongs  to  the  more  selfish  emotions.  An 
authority  says:  ^^Hnmor  is  a  mental  faculty  which 
tends  to  discover  incongruous  resemblances  between 
things  which  essentially  differ^  or  essential  differences 
between  things  put  forth  as  the  same,  the  result  being 
internal  mirth  or  an  outburst  of  laughter.  Wit  does 
so  likewise,  but  the  two  are  different.  Humor  has  deep 
human  sympathy,  and  loves  men  while  raising  a  laugh 
against  their  weaknesses.  Wit  is  deficient  in  sympathy, 
and  there  is  often  a  sting  in  its  ridicule.  Somewhat 
contemptuous  of  mankind,  it  has  not  the  patience  to 
study  tliem  thoroughly,  but  must  content  itself  with 
noting  superficial  resemblances  or  differences.  Humor 
is  patient  and  keenly  observant,  and  penetrates  beneath 
the  surface ;  while,  therefore,  the  sallies  of  wit  are  often 
one-sided  and  unfair,  those  of  humor  are,  as  a  rule,  just 
and  wise.^^ 

The  development  and  cultivation  of  the  intellectual 
emotions  depend,  of  course,  upon  education,  training, 
exercise,  and  practice.  The  cultivation  of  the  intellect 
(which  has  been  referred  to,  in  part,  in  the  previous 
parts  of  this  book,  and  which  will  be  again  considered 
in  the  chapters  devoted  to  the  intellect)  results  in  the 
development  and  cultivation  of  the  emotions  accom- 
panying intellectual  effort.  In  a  general  way,  however, 
it  may  be  said  that  the  reading  of  the  best  works  of 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    139 

fiction,  science,  and  philosophy  will  bring  out  in  time 
the  best  form  of  intellectual  enjoyment  and  feeling. 
The  highest  gives  the  best — that  is  the  rule.  The  pres- 
ent chapter  should  be  read  and  studied  in  connection 
with  those  devoted  to  the  intellect. 

Blended  Emotions. 

As  we  have  said  at  the  beginning  of  our  consideration 
of  the  subject  of  the  emotions,  the  majority  of  emotions 
are  composed  of  several  feelings,  and  tend  to  blend  and 
combine  emotional  elements.  For  instance,  the  emotion 
of  sexual  love  certainly  has  its  origin  in  the  instinctive 
feelings  of  the  race,  and  its  motive  element  is  that  of 
passion.  But  passion  is  far  from  being  all  there  is  in 
human  sexual  love.  Above  the  plane  of  passion  is 
found  the  social  emotion  of  companionship,  protection, 
and  care;  the  desire  for  the  welfare  of  the  loved  one; 
the  mingling  of  the  love  of  the  parent  with  that  of  the 
mate.  Human  love  manifests  many  of  the  altruistic 
emotions  during  its  course.  The  welfare  of  the  loved 
one  becomes  the  chief  concern  of  life,  often  stronger 
even  than  self-preservation.  The  joy  of  the  loved  one 
becomes  the  greatest  joy,  far  surpassing  the  more  selfish 
forms  of  happiness.  Then  come  the  aesthetic  feelings, 
which  find  satisfaction  in  the  two  ^^liking  the  same 
things,'^  sympathy  and  community  of  feeling  being  the 


130       YOUB  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

connecting  link.  The  several  ideals  of  the  two  com- 
bining, there  is  produced  an  idealistic  nnion^  which  is 
often  called  ^^spiritual  harmony/^  Finally,  there  is 
found  the  blending  of  the  intellectual  emotions,  in 
which  harmony  there  exists  one  of  the  highest  forms  of 
pleasure  satisfaction  between  two  persons  of  opposite 
sexes.  It  is  said  that  the  more  things  that  a  man  and 
woman  ^^like'^  in  common,  the  closer  will  be  their  ^^lik- 
ing^*  for  each  other.  ^^I  love  you  because  you  love  the 
things  I  love,^^  is  no  rare  thought  and  expression. 

So  it  is  seen  that  though  born  in  elemental  instinct 
and  passion,  human  sexual  love  is  something  far  differ- 
ent in  its  flowering.  And  yet  without  its  root  it  would 
not  be,  and  cannot  be.  This  is  an  excellent  example 
of  the  complex  nature  of  the  most  common  emotions. 
It  may  be  used  as  a  typical  illustration.  What  is  true 
of  it  is  also  true,  in  a  way  and  in  a  degree,  of  every 
other  form  of  emotion.  Therefore  in  studying  a  par- 
ticular emotion,  be  not  too  quick  to  cry,  ^^It  is  this; 
it  is  that!^^  but  rather  seek  to  say,  ^^It  is  composed  of 
this  and  that,  of  this  and  that!'^  Few,  if  any,  emo- 
tions are  simple ;  the  majority  are  very  complex.  Hence 
the  difficulty  of  satisfactory  classification,  and  the  dan- 
ger of  dogmatic  definition. 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

The  Role  of  the  Emotions. 

THE    average   person   greatly  underestimates   the 
part  played  by   the   emotional  nature  in   the 
mental  activities  of  the  individual.     He  is  in- 
clined to  the  opinion  that,  with  the  exception  of  the 
occasional  manifestation  of  some  strong  emotional  feel- 
ing, the  majority  of  persons  go  through  life  using  only 
the  reasoning  and  reflective  faculties  in  deciding  the 
problems   of   life    and  guiding  the  mental   course   of 
action.     There  can  be  no  greater  mistake  concerning 
the  mental  activities.     So  far  from  being  subordinate  to 
the  intellect,  the  emotional  nature  in  the  majority  of 
cases  dominates  the  reasoning  faculties.     There  are  but 
very  few  persons  who  are  able  to  detach  themselves,  even 
in  a  small   degree,  from  the  feelings,   and  to   decide 
questions  cold-bloodedly  by  pure  reason  or  intellectual 
effort.     Moreover,  there  are  but  few  persons  whose  wills 
are  guided  by   pure   reason;   the  feelings   supply   the 
motive  for  the  majority  of  acts  of  will.     The  intellect, 
even  when  used,  is  generally  employed  to  better  carry 
out  the  dictates  of  feeling  and  desire.     Much  of  our 
reasoning  is  performed  in  order  to  justify  our  feelings, 


133    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

or  to  find  proofs  for  the  position  dictated  by  our  de- 
sires, feelings,  sympathies,  prejudices,  or  sentiments. 
It  has  been  said  that  "men  seek  not  reasons  but  excuses 
for  their  actions/' 

Moreover,  in  the  elementary  processes  of  the  intellect 
the  emotions  play  an  important  part.  We  have  seen 
that  attention  largely  follows  interest,  and  interest  re- 
sults from  feeling.  Therefore  our  attention,  and  that 
which  arises  from  it,  is  dependent  largely  upon  the 
feelings.  Thus  feeling  asserts  its  power  in  guarding 
the  very  outer  gate  of  knowledge,  and  determines  largely 
what  shall  or  shall  not  enter  therein.  It  is  one  of  the 
constantly-appearing  paradoxes  of  psychology,  that 
while  feelings  have  originally  arisen  from  attention, 
it  is  equally  true  that  attention  depends  largely  upon 
the  interest  resulting  from  the  feelings.  This  is  read- 
ily admitted  in  the  case  of  involuntary  attention,  which 
always  goes  out  toward  objects  of  interest  and  feeling, 
but  is  likewise  true  of  even  voluntary  attention,  which 
we  direct  to  something  of  greater  or  more  nearly  ulti- 
mate interest  than  the  things  of  lesser  or  more  imme- 
diate interest. 

Sully  says:  "By  an  act  of  will  I  may  resolve  to 
turn  my  attention  to  something — say  a  passage  in  a 
book.  But  if,  after  the  preliminary  process  of  adjust- 
ment of  the  mental  eye  the  object  opens  up  no  inter- 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT,     133 

esting  phase,  all  the  willing  in  the  world  will  not  pro- 
duce a  calm,  settled  state  of  concentration.  The  will 
introduces  mind  and  object;  it  cannot  force  an  attach- 
ment between  them.  No  compulsion  of  attention  ever 
succeeded  in  making  a  young  child  cordially  embrace 
and  appropriate,  by  an  act  of  concentration,  an  unsuit- 
able and  therefore  uninteresting  object.  We  thus  see 
that  even  voluntary  interest  is  not  removed  from  the 
sway  of  interest.  What  the  will  does  is  to  determine 
the  hind  of  interest  that  shall  prevail  at  the  moment/^ 

Again,  we  may  see  that  memory  is  largely  dependent 
upon  interest  in  recording  and  recalling  its  impres- 
sions. We  remember  and  recall  most  easily  that  which 
most  greatly  interests  us.  In  proportion  to  the  lack  of 
interest  in  a  thing  do  we  find  difficulty  in  remembering 
or  recalling  it.  This  is  equally  true  of  the  imagination, 
for  it  refuses  to  dwell  upon  that  which  is  not  interest- 
ing. Even  in  the  reasoning  processes  we  find  the  will 
balking  at  uninteresting  subjects,  but  galloping  along, 
pushing  before  it  the  rolling  chair  of  interesting  intel- 
lectual application. 

Our  judgments  are  affected  by  our  feelings.  It  is 
much  easier  to  approve  of  the  actions  of  some  person 
we  like,  or  whose  views  accord  with  our  own,  than  of  an 
individual  whose  personality  and  views  are  distasteful 
to  us.     It  is  very  difficult  to  prevent  prejudice,  for  or 


134    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

against,  from  influencing  our  judgments.  It  is  also  true 
that  we  ^^find  that  for  which  we  look^^  in  things  and 
persons,  and  that  which  we  expect  and  look  for  is  often 
dependent  upon  our  feelings.  If  we  dislike  a  person 
or  thing  we  are  usually  able  to  perceive  no  end  of 
undesirable  things  in  him  or  it;  while  if  we  are  favor- 
ably inclined  we  easily  find  many  admirable  qualities 
in  the  same  person  or  thing.  A  little  change  in  our 
feeling  often  results  in  the  formation  of  an  entirely 
new  set  of  judgments  regarding  a  person  or  thing. 

Halleck  well  says :  ^^On  the  one  hand  the  emotions 
are  favorable  to  intellectual  action,  since  they  supply 
the  interest  one  feels  in  study.  One  may  feel  intensely 
concerning  a  certain  subject  and  be  all  the  better  stu- 
dent. Hence  the  emotions  are  not,  as  was  formerly 
thought,  entirely  hostile  to  intellectual  action.  Emo- 
tion often  quickens  the  perception,  burns  things  indel- 
ibly into  the  memory,  and  doubles  the  rapidity  of 
thought.  On  the  other  hand  strong  feelings  often  viti- 
ate every  operation  of  the  intellect.  They  cause  us  to 
see  only  what  we  wish  to,  to  remember  only  what  inter- 
ests our  narrow  feeling  at  the  time,  and  to  reason  from 
selfish  data  only.  *  *  *  Emotion  puts  the  magnifying 
end  of  the  telescope  to  our  intellectual  eyes  where  our 
own  interests  are  concerned,  the  minimizing  end  when 
we  are  looking  at  the  interest  of  others.  *  *  *  Thought 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    135 

IS  deflected  when  it  passes  through  an  emotional  me^ 
diunij  just  as  a  sunbeam  is  when  it  strihes  water/* 

As  for  the  will,  the  best  authorities  hold  that  it  is 
almost  if  not  entirely  dependent  upon  desire  for  its 
motive  force.  As  desire  is  an  outgrowth  and  develop- 
ment of  feeling  and  emotion,  it  is  seen  that  even  the 
will  depends  upon  feeling  for  its  inciting  motives  and 
its  direction.  We  shall  consider  this  point  at  greater  de- 
tail in  the  chapters  devoted  to  the  activities  of  the  will. 

We  would  remind  you  again,  at  this  point,  of  the 
great  triangle  of  the  mind,  the  emotional,  ideative,  and 
volitional  activities — feeling,  thinking,  and  willing — 
and  their  constant  reaction  upon  each  other  and  absolute 
interdependence.  We  find  that  our  feelings  arise  from 
previous  willing  and  ideation,  and  are  aroused  by  ideas 
and  repressed  by  will;  again  we  see  that  our  ideas  are 
largely  dependent  upon  the  interest  supplied  by  our 
feelings,  and  that  our  judgments  are  influenced  by  the 
emotive  side  of  our  mental  life,  the  will  also  having  its 
part  to  play  in  the  matter.  We  also  see  that  the  will 
is  called  into  activity  by  the  feelings,  and  often  guided 
or  restrained  by  our  thoughts,  the  will,  indeed,  being 
considered  as  moved  entirely  by  our  feelings  and  ideas. 
Thus  is  the  trinity  of  mental  forces  seen  ever  in  mutual 
relation — constant  action  and  reaction  ever  existing  be- 
tween them. 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

The  Ctnotions  and  Happiness. 

^^'T  TTAPPINESS'^  has  been  defined  by  an  author- 
I  I  ity  as  "the  pleasurable  emotion  arising 
-^  -*-  from  the  gratification  of  all  desires ;  the 
enjoyment  of  pleasure  without  pain/^  Another  has 
said  that  ^Tiappiness  is  the  state  in  which  all  desires  are 
satisfied/^  But  these  definitions  have  been  attacked. 
It  is  held  by  many  that  a  state  of  the  absolute  satisfac- 
tion of  desire  would  not  be  happiness,  for  happiness 
consists  largely  in  pleasurable  anticipation  and  imagin- 
ings which  disappear  upon  the  realization  of  the  desire. 
It  is  held  that  absolute  satisfaction  would  be  a  nega- 
tive state.  Paley  expressed  a  better  idea  when  he  said 
that  "any  condition  may  be  denominated  ^happy'  in 
which  the  amount  or  aggregate  of  pleasure  exceeds  that 
of  pain,  and  the  degree  of  happiness  depends  upon  the 
quantity  of  this  excess.'^ 

Some  have  held  that  an  existing  contrast  between 
pain  and  pleasure  (the  balance  being  in  favor  of  the 
latter)  is  necessary  to  establish  happiness.  Be  this  as 
it  may,  it  is  admitted  by  all  that  one^s  happiness  or 
unhappiness  depends  entirely  upon  one's  emotional  na- 


YOUE  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.     137 

ture  and  the  degree  of  the  satisfaction  thereof.  And  it 
is  generally  admitted  that  to  be  happy  is  the  great  aim 
and  object  of  the  life  of  the  majority  of  persons, — if, 
indeed,  not  of  every  person, — the  happiness,  of  course, 
depending  upon  the  quality  and  degree  of  the  emotions 
forming  the  person's  emotional  nature.  Thus  it  is  seen 
that  we  are  dependent  upon  the  emotional  side  of  our 
mental  life  in  this  as  in  nearly  everything  else  making 
life  worth  while. 

Theologians  have  often  sought  to  point  out  that  hap- 
piness is  not  the  goal  of  life  and  living,  but  human 
nature  has  always  insisted  that  happiness  is  the  great- 
est end,  and  philosophy  has  generally  supported  it.  But 
wisdom  shows  that  happiness  is  not  always  dependent 
upon  the  pleasure  of  the  moment,  for  the  sacrifice  of 
immediate  pleasure  frequently  results  in  a  much  greater 
happiness  in  the  future.  In  the  same  way  an  imme- 
diate disagreeable  task  often  gains  for  us  a  greater 
satisfaction  in  the  future.  Likewise,  it  is  frequently 
greater  happiness  to  sacrifice  a  personal  pleasure  for  the 
happiness  of  others  than  it  would  be  to  enjoy  the 
pleasure  of  the  moment  at  the  expense  of  the  pain  of 
the  other.  There  is  often  a  far  greater  pleasure  result- 
ing from  an  altruistic  action  of  self-sacrifice  than  in 
the  performance  of  the  selfish,  egoistic  act.  But,  as 
the  subtle  reasoner  may  insist,  the  result  is  the  same 


138    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

— ^the  ultimate  happiness  and  satisfaction  of  the  self. 
This  conclusion  does  not  rob  the  altruistic  ac'  of  its 
virtue,  however,  for  the  person  who  finds  his  greatest 
pleasure  in  giving  pleasure  to  others  is  to  be  con- 
gratulated— as  is  the  community  which  shelters  him. 

There  is  no  virtue  in  pain,  suffering,  sacrifice,  or 
unhappiness  for  its  own  sake.  This  illusion  of  asceti- 
cism is  vanishing  from  the  human  mind.  Sacrifice  on 
the  part  of  the  individual  is  valuable  and  valid  only 
when  it  results  in  higher  present  or  future  happiness  for 
the  individual  or  some  one  else.  There  is  no  virtue  in 
pain,  physical  or  mental,  except  as  a  step  to  a  greater 
good  for  ourselves  or  others.  Pain  at  the  best  is  merely 
nature's  alarm  and  warning  of  ^^not  this  way/^  It  is 
also  held  that  pain  serves  to  bring  out  pleasure  by 
contrast,  and  is  therefore  valuable  in  this  way.  Be  this 
as  it  may,  no  normal  individual  deliberately  seeks  ulti- 
mate pain  in  preference  to  ultimate  happiness;  the 
greatest  ultimate  happiness  to  one's  self  and  to  those 
he  loves  is  the  normal  and  natural  goal  of  the  normal 
person.  But  the  concept  of  ^^those  he  loves/'  in  many 
cases,  includes  the  race  as  well  as  the  iminediate  family. 

Wisdom  shows  the  individual  that  the  greatest  happi- 
ness comes  to  him  who  controls  and  restrains  many  of 
his  feelings.  Dissipation  results  in  pain  and  unhappi- 
ness ultimately.    The  doctrine  of  thoughtless  indulgence 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    139 

is  unphilosophkal  and  is  contradicted  by  the  experience 
of  the  race.  Moreover,  wisdom  shows  that  the  highest 
happiness  comes  not  from  the  indulgence  of  the  phys- 
ical feelings  alone,  or  to  excess,  but  rather  from  the 
cultivation,  development,  and  manifestation  of  the 
higher  feelings — the  social,  aesthetic,  and  intellectual 
emotions.  The  higher  pleasures  of  life,  literature,  art, 
music,  science,  invention,  constructive  imagination,  etc., 
yield  a  satisfaction  and  happiness  keener  and  more 
enduring  than  can  possibly  the  lower  forms  of  feeling. 
But  the  human  being  must  not  despise  any  part  of  his 
emotional  being.  Everything  has  its  uses,  which  are 
good;  and  its  abuses,  which  are  bad.  Every  part  of 
one's  being,  mental  and  physical,  is  well  to  use ;  but  no 
part  is  well  used  if  it  uses  the  individual  instead  of 
being  itself  used. 

A  recent  writer  has  held  that  the  end  and  aim  of  life 
should  not  be  the  pursuit  of  happiness,  but  rather  the 
building  of  character.  The  obvious  answer  is  that  the 
two  are  identical  in  spirit,  for  to  the  man  who  appre- 
ciates the  value  of  character,  its  attainment  is  the  great- 
est happiness ;  the  wise  teach  that  the  greatest  happiness 
comes  to  him  who  is  possessed  of  a  well-rounded,  devel- 
oped character.  Another  writer  has  said  that  ^^the  aim 
of  life  should  be  self-improvement,  with  a  due  regard 
to  the  interest  of  others.'^     This  is  but  saying  that  the 


140     YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

greatest  happiness  to  the  wise  man  lies  in  this  course. 
Any  one  who  is  wise  enough,  or  great  enough,  to  make 
these  ends  the  aim  and  goal  of  life  will  find  the  greatest 
happiness  therefrom.  Arnold  Bennett  advances  as  a 
good  working  philosophy  of  life:  ^^cheerfulness,  kindli- 
ness, and  rectitude.^^  Can  any  one  doubt  that  this 
course  would  bring  great  ultimate  happiness? 

Happiness  consists  in  that  which  "contents  the 
spirit,^^  and  the  latter  depends  entirely  upon  the  char- 
acter of  the  feelings  and  emotions  entertained  by  one, 
as  weighed  in  the  balance  of  reason,  and  as  passed  upon 
by  judgment  and  the  sense  of  right  action.  The  great- 
est degree  of  happiness,  or  at  least  the  greatest  ratio 
of  pleasure  over  pain,  is  obtained  by  a  careful  and  intel- 
ligent cultivation  of  the  feeling  side  of  one's  being  in 
connection  with  the  cultivation  of  the  intellect  and  the 
mastery  of  the  will.  To  be  able  to  bring  the  capacity 
for  enjoyment  to  its  highest ;  to  be  able  to  intelligently 
choose  that  which  will  bring  the  greatest  ultimate  hap- 
piness in  accordance  with  right  action;  and,  finally,  to 
be  able  to  use  the  will  in  the  direction  of  holding  fast 
to  that  which  is  good  and  rejecting  that  which  is  bad — 
this  is  the  power  of  creating  happiness.  The  feelings, 
the  intellect,  and  the  will — ^her^,  as  ever — combine  to 
manifest  the  result. 

Finally,  it  must  be  remembered  that  all  human  hap- 


YOUB  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    141 

piness  consists  in  part  of  the  ability  to  bear  pain — ^to 
suffer.  There  must  be  the  dash  of  Stoicism  in  the 
wise  Epicurean.  One  must  learn  to  pluck  from  pain, 
suffering,  and  unhappiness  the  secret  drop  of  honey 
which  lies  at  its  heart,  and  which  consists  in  the 
knowledge  of  the  meaning  and  use  of  pain  and  the 
means  whereby  it  may  be  transmuted  into  knowledge 
and  experience,  from  which  later  happiness  may  be 
distilled.  To  profit  by  pain,  to  transmute  suffering 
into  joy,  to  transform  present  unhappiness  into  a  future 
greater  happiness — this  is  the  privilege  of  the  philos- 
opher. 

« 

The  mental  states  and  activities  known  as  ^^desire^' 

are  a  direct  development  of  the  feeling  and  emotional 
phase  of  the  mind  and  form  the  motive  power  of  the 
will.  Desire,  in  fact,  may  be  said  to  be  composed  of 
feeling  on  one  side  and  will  on  the  other.  But  the 
influence  of  the  intellect  or  reasoning  faculties  has 
a  most  important  part  to  play  in  the  evolution  of  feel- 
ing into  desire,  and  in  the  consequent  action  of  the  will 
by  the  presentation  and  weighing  of  conflicting  desires. 
Therefore,  the  logical  place  for  the  consideration  of  the 
activities  of  the  intellect  is  at  this  point — ^between  emo- 
tion and  will.  Accordingly,  we  shall  leave  the  subject 
of  feeling  and  emotion  for  the  present,  to  be  taken  up 


143     YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

again  in  connection  with  the  subject  of  desire,  after  we 
have  considered  the  intellectual  processes  of  the  mind. 
But,  as  has  been  indicated,  we  shall  see  the  presence  and 
influence  of  the  feelings  and  emotions  even  in  the 
activities  of  the  intellect. 


CHAPTER  XX. 

The  Intellect. 

THE  class  of  mental  states  or  processes  grouped 
together  under  the  name  of  ^^intellectual  proc- 
esses/^ forms  the  second  great  division  of  the 
mental  states,  the  two  others  being  ^^f eeling^^  and  ^Vill/^ 
respectively. 

^^Intellect'^  has  been  defined  as  follows:  ^^The  part 
or  faculty  of  the  human  mind  by  which  it  knows,  as 
distinguished  from  the  power  to  feel  and  to  will;  the 
thinking  faculty;  the  understanding;^^  also  as  "that 
faculty  of  the  human  mind  by  which  it  receives  or 
comprehends  the  ideas  communicated  to  it  by  the  senses 
or  the  perception,  or  other  means,  as  distinguished  from 
the  power  to  feel  and  to  will;  the  power  or  faculty  to 
perceive  objects  in  their  relations;  the  power  to  judge 
and  comprehend;  also  the  capacity  for  higher  forms  of 
knowledge,  as  distinguished  from  the  power  to  perceive 
and  imagine.^^ 

In  the  preceding  chapters  we  have  seen  that  the 
individual  is  able  to  experience  sensations  in  conscious- 
ness, and  that  he  is  able  tr>  j^f^jr^gjj^  theTn  mentally,  the 
latter  being^he  first  step  in  intellectual  activity.     We 


144    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

have  also  seen  that  he  is  able  to  reproduce  the  percep- 
tion by  means  of  memory  and  imagination,  and  that 
by  means  of  the  latter  he  is  able  to  re-combine  and 
rearrange  the  objects  of  perception.  We  have  also  seen 
that  he  has  what  are  known  as  ^^f€elings,^^:wMch  depend 
upon  his  jrevious  experience__and_that  of  his  prngen- 
itor^.  So  far  the  mind  has  been  considered  merely  as 
a  receiving  and  reproducing  instrument,  with  the  added 
attachment  of  the  re-combining  power  of  the  imagina- 
tion. Up  to  this  point  the  mind  may  be  compared  to 
the  phonographic  cylinder,  with  an  attachment  capable 
of  re-combining  its  recorded  impressions.  The  impres- 
sions are  received  and  perceived,  are  stored  away,  are 
reproduced,  and  by  the  use  of  the  imagination  are 
re-combined. 

Up  to  this  point  the  mind  is  seen  to  be  more  or  less 
of  an  automatic,  instinctive  faculty.  It  may  be  traced 
from  the  purely  reflex  activity  of  the  lowest  forms  of 
life  up  through  the  lower  animals,  step  by  step,  until 
a  very  high  degree  of  mental  power  is  perceived  in  ani- 
mals like  the  horse,  dog,  or  elephant.  But  there  is 
something  lacking.  There  is  missing  that  peculiar 
power  of  thinking  in  symbols  and  abstract  conceptions 
which  distinguishes  the  human  race  and  which  is  closely 
bound  up  with  the  faculty  of  language  or  expressing 
thoughts   in   words.     The   comparatively  high   mental 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT,    145 

process  of  the  lower  animals  is  dwarfed  by  the  human 
faculty  of  '^thinking/^  And  thinking  is  the  manifesta- 
tion of  the  intellect. 

What  is  it  to  think  f  Strange  to  say,  very  few  per- 
sons can  answer  this  question  correctly  at  first.  They 
find  themselves  inclined  to  answer  the  inquiry  in  the 
words  of  the  child:  ^^Why,  to  think  is  to  think T  Let 
us  see  if  we  can  make  it  plain.  The  dictionary  defini- 
tion is  a  little  too  technical  to  be  of  much  use  to  the 
beginner,  but  here  it  is :  "To  employ  any  of  the  intel- 
lectual powers  except  that  of  simple  perception  through 
the  senses.^^  But  what  are  the  "intellectual  powers'^ 
so  employed,  and  how  are  they  employed?     Let  us  see. 

Stating  the  matter  plainly  in  common  terms,  we  may 
say  that  "thjnking^^  is  the  mental  process  of  (1)  com- 
paring our  perceptions  of  things  with  each  other,  noting 
the  points  of  likeness  and  of  difference;  (2)  classifying 
them  according  to  the  ascertained  likeness  or  difference, 
and  thus  tying  them  up  in  mental  bundles  with  each 
set  of  "things  of  a  kind''  in  its  own  bundle;  (3)  form- 
ing the  abstract,  symbolic  mental  idea  (concept)  of 
each  class  of  things,  so  grouped,  which  we  may  after- 
ward use  as  we  use  figures  in  mathematical  calculations ; 
(4)  using  these  concepts  in  order  to  form  inferences, 
that  is,  to  reason  from  the  known  to  the  unknown,  and 
to  form  judgments  regarding  things;    (5)   comparing 


146    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

these  judgments  and  deducing  higher  judgments  from 
them;  and  so  on. 

Without  thinking,  man  would  he  dependent  upon 
each  particular  experience  for  his  knowledge,  except  so 
far  as  memory  and  imagination  could  instinctively  aid 
him.  By  thought  processes  he  is  enabled  to  infer  that 
if  certain  things  be  true  of  one  of  a  certain  kind  of 
things,  the  same  thing  may  be  expected  from  others  of 
the  same  class.  As  he  is  able  to  note  points  of  likeness 
or  difference,  he  is  able  to  form  clearer  and  truer  infer- 
ences. In  addition^  he  is  able  to  apply  his  constructive 
imagination  to  the  rearrangement  and  recombination 
of  things  whose  nature  he  has  discovered,  and  thus 
progress  along  the  line  of  material  achievement  as  well 
as  of  knowledge.  It  must  be  remembered,  however, 
that  the  intellect  depends  entirely  for  its  material  upon 
the  perception,  which  in  turn  receives  its  raw  material 
from  the  senses.  The  intellect  merely  groups  together 
the  material  of  perception,  makes  inferences,  draws 
conclusions  from,  and  forms  conclusions  regarding, 
them,  and  in  the  case  of  constructive  imagination 
recombines  them  in  effective  forms  and  arrangement. 
The  intellect  is  the  last  in  order  in  the  course  of  mental 
evolution.  It  appears  last  in  order  in  the  mind  of  the 
child,  but  it  often  persists  in  old  age  after  the  feelings 
have  grown  dim  and  the  memory  weak. 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.     147 

Concepts. 

What  is  known  as  the  ^^concepf'  is  the  first  fruit  of 
the  elemental  processes  of  thought.  The  various  im- 
ages of  outside  objects  are  sensed,  then  perceived,  and 
then  grouped  according  to  their  likenesses  and  differ- 
ences, and  the  result  is  the  production  of  concepts.  It 
is  difficult  to  define  a  concept  so  as  to  convey  any  mean- 
ing to  the  beginner.  For  instance,  the  dictionaries  give 
the  definition  as  ^^an  abstract,  general  conception,  idea, 
or  notion  formed  in  the  mind.^^  Not  very  clear  this,  is 
it  ?  Perhaps  we  can  understand  it  better  if  we  say  that 
the  terms  dog,  cat,  man,  horse,  house,  etc.,  each  ex- 
presses a  concept.  Every  term  expresses  a  concept; 
every  general  name  of  a  thing  or  quality  is  a  term 
applied  to  the  concept.  We  shall  see  this  a  little  clearer 
as  we  proceed. 

We  form  a  concept  in  this  way :  ( 1 )  We  perceive  a 
number  of  things;  (2)  then  we  notice  certain  qualities 
possessed  by  things — certain  properties,  attributes,  or 
characteristics  which  make  the  thing  what  it  is;  (3) 
then  we  compare  these  qualities  of  the  thing  with  the 
qualities  of  other  things  and  see  that  there  is  a  likeness 
in  some  cases,  in  various  degrees,  and  a  difference  in 
other  cases,  in  various  degrees;  (4)  then  we  generalize 
or  classify  the  perceived  things  according  to  their  ascer- 
tained likenesses  and  differences;   (5)  then  we  form  a 


148     YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

general  idea  or  concept  embodying  each  class  of  thing; 
and,  finally,  we  give  to  the  concept  a  term,  or  name, 
which  is  its  svmboL 

The  concept  is  a  general  idea  of  a  class  of  things; 
the  term  is  the  expression  of  that  general  idea.  The 
concept  is  the  idea  of  a  class  of  things ;  the  term  is  the 
label  affixed  to  the  thing.  To  illustrate  this  last  dis- 
tinction, let  ns  take  the  concept  and  term  of  ^T)ird/^ 
for  instance.  By  perception,  comparison,  and  classifi- 
cation of  the  qualities  of  living  things  we  have  arrived 
at  the  conclusion  that  there  exists  a  great  general  class 
the  qualities  of  which  may  be  stated  thus :  ^^arm- 
blooded,  feathered,  winged,  oviparou-s,  vertebrate.^^  To 
this  general  class  of  quality-possessing  animals  we  apply 
the  English  term  ^*^bird.^'  The  name  is  merely  a  sym- 
bol. In  German  the  term  is  vogel;  in  Latin,  avis;  but 
in  each  and  every  case  the  general  idea  or  concept  above 
stated,  i,  e.,  ^Varm-blooded,  feathered,  winged,  ovipa- 
rous, vertebrate,^^  is  meant.  If  anything  is  found  having 
all  of  those  particular  qualities,  then  we  know  it  must 
be  what  we  call  a  ^^bird.^'  And  everything  that  we  call 
a  ^^bird''  must  have  those  qualities.  The  term  '^TDird" 
is  the  symbol  for  that  particular  combination  of  quali- 
ties existing  in  a  thing. 

There  is  a  difference  between  a  mental  image  of  the 
imagination  and  a  concept.     The  mental  image  must 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT,    149 

always  be  of  a  particular  thing,  while  the  concept  is 
always  an  idea  of  a  general  class  of  things  which  can- 
not be  clearly  pictured  in  the  mind.  For  instance,  the 
imagination  may  form  the  mental  picture  of  any  known 
bird,  or  even  of  an  imaginary  bird,  but  that  bird  always 
will  be  a  distinct,  particular  bird.  Try  to  form  a  men- 
tal picture  of  the  general  class  of  birds — ^how  will  you 
do  it?  Do  you  realize  the  difficulty?  First,  such  an 
image  would  have  to  include  the  characteristics  of  the 
large  birds,  such  as  the  eagle,  ostrich,  and  condor;  and 
of  the  small  birds,  such  as  the  wren  and  humming  bird. 
It  must  be  a  composite  of  the  shape  of  all  birds,  from 
the  ostrich,  swan,  eagle,  crane,  down  to  the  sparrow, 
swallow,  and  humming  bird.  It  must  picture  the  par- 
ticular qualities  of  birds  of  prey,  water  birds,  and 
domestic  fowls,  as  well  as  the  grain  eaters.  It  must 
exhibit  all  the  colors  found  in  bird  life,  from  the  bright- 
est'reds  and  greens  down  to  the  sober  grays  and  browns. 
A  little  thought  will  show  that  a  clear  mental  image  of 
such  a  concept  is  impossible.  What  the  most  of  us  do, 
when  we  think  of  ^^bird,'"*  is  to  picture  a  vague,  flying 
shape  of  dull  color;  but  when  we  stop  to  think  that 
the  term  must  also  include  the  waddling  duck  and  the 
scratching  barnyard  chicken,  we  see  tJiat  our  mental 
image  is  faulty.  The  trouble  is  that  the  term  "bird'' 
really  means  "all-bird,''  and  we  cannot  picture  an  "all- 


150    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT, 

bird^^  from  the  very  nature  of  the  case.  Our  terms, 
therefore,  are  like  mathematical  figures,  or  algebraic 
symbols,  which  we  use  for  ease,  speed,  and  clearness  of 
thinking. 

The  trouble  does  not  end  here.  Concepts  not  only 
include  the  general  idea  of  things,  but  also  the  general 
idea  of  the  qualities  of  things.  Thus  sweetness,  hard- 
ness, courage,  and  energy  are  concepts,  but  we  cannot 
form  a  mental  image  of  them  by  themselves.  We  may 
picture  a  sweet  thing,  but  not  sweetness  itself.  So-  you 
see  that  a  concept  is  a  purely  abstract  mental  idea — a 
symbol — akin  to  the  figures  1,  2,  3,  etc.,  and  used  in 
the  same  way.  They  stand  for  general  classes  of  things. 
A  ^"^term^^  is  the  verbal  and  written  expression  of  the 
general  idea  or  concept.  The  student  is  requested  to 
fix  these  distinctions  in  his  mind,  so  as  to  render  further 
understanding  of  them  easy. 


CHAPTEE  XXI. 

Conception. 

THE  process  of  conception  has  been  well  defined 
by  Gordy  as  ^^that  act  of  mind  by  which  it 
forms  an  idea  of  a  class;  or  that  act  of  the 
mind  that  enables  ns  to  use  general  names  intelligently/^ 
He  adds :  ^^It  is,  of  course,  understood  that  I  am  using 
the  word  ^class'  to  denote  an  indefinite  number  of  indi- 
viduals that  resemble  each  other  in  certain  particulars." 

Perception. 

The  first  step  in  conception,  as  we  have  seen,  is  that 
of  perception.  It  is  readily  perceived  that  the  char- 
acter of  our  intellectual  processes  depends  materially 
upon  the  variety,  clearness,  and  accuracy  of  our  per- 
ceptions. Therefore,  again,  we  would  refer  our  stu- 
dents to  the  chapter  in  which  we  have  stated  the 
importance  of  clear  perception. 

Memory. 

The  future  steps  of  conception  depend  materially 
upon  the  clearness  of  the  memory,  as  we  can  classify 


152    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

objects  only  by  remembering  their  qualities  beyond  the 
immediate  moment  of  actual,  original  perception. 
Therefore,  the  memory  should  be  strengthened  for  this 
as  well  as  other  objects. 

Abstraction. 

The  second  step  in  conception  is  that  of  the  mental 
abstraction  of  qualities  from  the  observed  thing.  That 
is,  we  must  perceive  and  then  mentally  set  aside  the 
observed  qualities  of  the  thing.  For  instance,  man  first 
perceived  the  existence  of  certain  qualities  in  things. 
He  found  that  a  certain  number  of  things  possessed 
some  of  these  qualities  in  common,  while  others  pos- 
sessed other  qualities  in  the  same  way,  and  thus  arose 
classification  from  comparison.  But  both  comparison 
and  classification  are  possible  only  by  abstraction,  or 
the  perception  of  the  quality  as  a  'Hhing'' ;  thus,  the 
abstraction  of  the  idea  of  the  quality  of  sweetness  from 
the  idea  of  sugar.  Sweetness  is  a  quality  rather  than 
a  thing  itself.  It  is  something  possessed  by  sugar  which 
helps  to  make  sugar  what  it  is. 

Color,  shape,  size,  mental  qualities,  habits  of  action — 
these  are  some  of  the  qualities  first  observed  in  things 
and  abstracted  from  them  in  thought.  Eedness,  sweet- 
ness, hardness,  softness,  largeness,  smallness,  fragrance, 
swiftness,    slowness,    fierceness,    gentleness,    warmness, 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    153 

coldness,  etc. — these  are  abstracted  qualities  of  things. 
Of  course  these  qualities  are  really  never  divorced  from 
things,  but  the  mind  divorces  them  in  order  to  make 
thinking  easier.  An  authority  says :  ^^ Animals  are  in- 
capable of  making  abstractions,  and  that  is  the  reason 
why  they  cannot  develop  formal  thought.  *  *  *  Abstract 
thought  is  identical  with  rational  thought,  which  is  the 
characteristic  feature  of  the  thought  of  speaking  beings. 
This  is  the  reason  why  abstract  thought  is  upon  earth 
the  exclusive  property  of  man,  and  why  brutes  are  in- 
capable of  abstract  thought.  The  process  of  naming 
is  the  mechanism  of  abstraction,  for  names  establish  the 
mental  independence  of  the  objects  named/^ 

The  processes  of  abstraction  depend  upon  attention — 
concentrated  attention.  Attention  directed  to  the  quali- 
ties of  a  thing  tends  to  abstract  the  qualities  in  thought 
from  the  thing  itself.  Mill  says :  ^^Abstraction  is  pri- 
marily the  result  of  attention.^'  Hamilton  says :  ^^At- 
tention and  abstraction  are  only  the  same  process  viewed 
in  different  relations.^^  Cultivation  of  the  power  of 
abstraction  means  principally  cultivation  of  attention. 
Any  mental  activity  which  tends  toward  analysis  or 
separation  of  a  thing  into  its  parts,  qualities,  or  ele- 
ments will  serve  to  cultivate  and  develop  the  power  of 
abstraction. 

The  habit  of  converting  qualities  into   concepts  is 


154    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

acquired  by  transforming  adjective  terms  into  their 
corresponding  noun  terms.  For  instance,  a  piece  of 
colored  candy  possesses  the  qualities  of  being  round, 
hard,  red,  sweet,  etc.  Transforming  these  adjective 
qualities  into  noun  terms  we  have  the  concepts  of  round- 
ness, hardness,  redness,  and  sweetness,  respectively. 


Comparison'. 

The  third  step  in  conception  is  that  of  comparison, 
in  which  the  qualities  of  several  things  are  compared 
or  examined  for  likenesses  and  differences.  We  find 
many  qualities  in  which  the  several  things  differ,  and  a 
few  in  which  there  is  a  likeness.  Classes  are  formed 
from  resemblances  or  likenesses,  while  individuals  are 
separated  from  apparent  classes  by  detection  of  differ- 
ences. Finally,  it  is  found  that  separate  things,  while 
having  many  points  of  difference  which  indicate  their 
individuality,  nevertheless  have  a  few  points  of  likeness 
which  indicate  that  they  belong  to  the  same  general 
family  or  class.  The  detection  of  likenesses  and  differ- 
ences in  the  qualities  of  various  things  is  an  important 
mental  process.  Many  of  the  higher  thought  processes 
depend  largely  upon  the  ability  to  compare  things  prop- 
erly. The  development  of  attention  and  perception  tends 
to  develop  the  power  of  comparison. 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.     155 

Classification  or  Generalization. 

The  fourth  step  in  conception  is  that  of  classification 
or  generalization,  whereby  we  place  individual  things  in 
a  mental  bundle  or  class,  and  then  this  bundle  in  com- 
pany with  other  bundles  into  a  higher  class,  and  so  on. 
Thus  we  group  all  the  individual  small  birds  having 
certain  characteristics  into  a  species,  then  several  related 
species  into  a  larger  family,  and  this  into  a  still  larger, 
until  finally  we  group  all  the  bird  families  into  the  great 
family  which  we  call  ^^birds"  and  of  which  the  simple 
term  "bird'^  expresses  the  general  concept. 

Jevons  says :  ^^We  classify  things  together  whenever 
we  observe  that  they  are  like  each  other  in  any  respect, 
and  therefore  think  of  them  together.  In  classifying  a 
collection  of  objects,  we  do  not  merely  put  together  into 
groups  those  which  resemble  each  other,  but  we  also 
divide  each  class  into  smaller  ones  in  which  the  resem- 
blance is  more  complete.  Thus  the  class  of  white  sub- 
stances may  be  divided  into  those  which  are  solid,  and 
those  which  are  fluid,  so  that  we  get  the  two  minor 
classes  of  solid-white  and  fluid-white  substances.  It  is 
desirable  to  have  names  by  which  to  show  that  one  class 
is  contained  in  another,  and,  accordingly,  we  call  the 
class  which  is  divided  into  two  or  more  smaller  ones  the 
genus,  and  the  smaller  ones  into  which  it  is  divided, 
the  species/^ 


156    YOUB  MIND  AND  ROW  TO  USE  IT. 

Every  species  is  a  small  family  of  the  individuals 
composing  it,  and  at  the  same  time  is  an  individual 
species  of  the  genus  just  above  it ;  the  genus,  in  turn,  is 
a  family  of  several  species,  and  at  the  same  time  an 
individual  genus  in  the  greater  family  or  genus  above  it. 

The  student  may  familiarize  himself  with  the  idea  of 
generalization  by  considering  himself  as  an  individual, 
John  Smith.  John  represents  that  unit  of  generaliza- 
tion. The  next  step  is  to  combine  John  with  the  other 
Smiths  of  his  immediate  family.  Then  this  family 
may  be  grouped  with  his  near  blood  relations,  and  so  on, 
until  finally  all  the  related  Smiths,  near  and  remote,  are 
grouped  together  in  a  great  Smith  family. 

Or,  in  the  same  way,  the  family  group  may  be  en- 
larged until  it  takes  in  all  the  white  people  in  a  county, 
then  all  the  white  people  in  the  state,  then  all  in  the 
United  States;  then  all  the  white  races,  then  all  the 
white  and  other  light-skinned  races,  then  all  mankind. 
Then,  if  one  is  inclined,  the  process  may  be  continued 
until  it  embraces  every  living  creature  from  moneron 
to  man.  Eeversing  the  process,  living  creatures  may  be 
divided  and  subdivided  until  all  mankind  is  seen  to 
stand  as  a  class.  Then  the  race  of  man  may  be  divided 
into  sub-races  according  to  color;  then  the  white  race 
may  be  subdivided  into  Americans  and  non- Americans. 
Then  the  Americans  may  be  divided  into  inhabitants  of 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    157 

the  several  states,  or  into  Indianans  and  non-Indianans ; 
then  into  the  inhabitants  of  the  several  counties  of 
Indiana,  and  thus  the  Posey  Countians  are  reached. 
Then  the  Posey  County  people  are  divided  into  Smiths 
and  non-Smiths;  then  the  Smith  family  into  its  con- 
stituent family  groups,  and  then  into  the  smaller  fami- 
lies, and  so  on,  until  the  classification  reaches  one  par- 
ticular John  Smith,  who  at  last  is  found  to  be  an 
individual — in  a  class  by  himself.  This  is  the  story  of 
the  ascending  and  descending  processes  of  generaliza- 
tion. 


CHAPTER  XXII. 

Classes  of  Concepts. 

IN"  the  preceding  chapter  we  have  seen  the  process 
of  conception — of  the  forming  of  concepts.  The 
idea  of  a  general  class  of  things  or  qualities  is  a 
concept.  Each  concept  contains  the  qualities  which  are 
common  to  all  the  individuals  composing  the  class^,  but 
not  those  qualities  which  pertain  only  to  the  minor 
classes  or  the  individuals.  For  instance,  the  concept  of 
^^bird'^  will  necessarily  include  the  common  qualities  of 
warm-bloodedness,  f  eatheredness,  wingedness,  oviparous- 
ness,  and  vertebratedness.  But  it  will  not  include  color, 
special  shape,  size,  or  special  features  or  characteristics 
of  the  subfamilies  or  individuals  composing  the  great 
class.  The  class  comprises  the  individuals  and  sub- 
classes composing  it;  the  concept  includes  the  general 
and  common  qualities  which  all  in  the  class  possess.  A 
percept  is  the  mental  image  of  a  particular  thing;  a 
concept  is  the  mental  idea  of  the  general  qualities  of  a 
class  of  things.  A  percept  arises  from  the  perception  of 
a  sensation ;  a  concept  is  a  purely  mental,  abstract  crea- 
tion, whose  only  existence  is  in  the  world  of  ideas  and 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    159 

which  has  no  corresponding  individual  object  in  the 
world  of  sense. 

There  are  two  general  classes  of  concepts,  namely: 
(1)  concrete  concepts,  in  which  the  common  qualities 
of  a  class  of  things  are  combined  into  one  conceptual 
idea,  such  as  ^^bird/^  of  which  we  have  spoken;  (2) 
abstract  concepts,  in  which  is  combined  the  idea  of  some 
quality  common  to  a  number  of  things,  such  as  ^^sweet- 
ness^^  or  ^^redness/^  Jevons^s  well-known  rule  for  terms 
is  an  aid  in  remembering  this  classification:  ^^A  con- 
crete term  is  the  name  of  a  thing;  an  abstract  term  is 
the  name  of  a  quality  of  a  thing/' 

It  is  a  peculiar  fact  and  rule  of  concrete  concepts 
that  (1)  the  larger  the  class  of  things  embraced  in  a 
concept,  the  smaller  are  its  general  qualities;  and  (2) 
the  larger  the  number  of  general  qualities  included  in 
a  concept,  the  smaller  the  number  of  individuals  em- 
braced by  it.  For  instance,  the  term  ^^bird^^  embraces 
a  great  number  of  individuals — all  the  birds  that  are 
in  existence,  in  fact,  but  it  has  but  few  general  quali- 
ties, as  we  have  seen.  On  the  contrary,  the  concept 
^^stork^^  has  a  much  larger  number  of  general  qualities, 
but  embraces  far  fewer  individuals.  Finally,  the  indi- 
vidual is  reached,  and  we  find  that  it  has  more  qualities 
than  any  class  can  have;  but  it  is  composed  of  the 
smallest  possible  number  of  individuals,  one.    The  secret 


160     YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

is  this :  No  two  individuals  can  have  as  many  qualities 
in  common  as  each  has  individually^  unless  they  are 
precisely  alike,  vrhich  is  impossible  in  nature. 

Imperfect  Co:n'cepts. 

It  is  said  that  outside  of  strictly  scientific  definitions 
very  few  persons  agree  in  their  concepts  of  the  same 
thing.  Each  has  his  or  her  own  concept  of  the  partic- 
ular thing  which  he  or  she  expresses  by  the  same  term. 
A  number  of  persons  asked  to  define  a  common  term  like 
"love/^  ^'religion/^  ^^faith/^  ^^belief/^  etc.,  will  give  such 
a  variety  of  answers  as  to  cause  wonderment.  As  'Green 
says:  "My  idea  or  image  is  mine  alone — ^the  reward 
of  careless  observation  if  imperfect;  of  attentive,  care- 
ful, and  varied  observation  if  correct.  Between  mine 
and  yours  a  great  gulf  is  fixed.  N'o  man  can  pass  from 
mine  to  yours,  or  from  yours  to  mine.  Neither  in  any 
proper  sense  of  the  term  can  mine  be  conveyed  to  you. 
Words  do  not  convey  thoughts;  they  are  not  vehicles 
of  thoughts  in  any  true  sense  of  that  term.  A  word  is 
simply  a  common  symbol  which  each  associates  with  his 
own  idea  or  image.^^ 

The  reason  of  the  difference  in  the  concepts  of  several 
persons  is  that  very  few  of  our  concepts  are  nearly  per- 
fect; the  majority  of  them  are  quite  imperfect  and 
incomplete.     Jevons   gives  us   an   idea  of  this  in  his 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    161 

remarks  on  classification:  "Things  may  seem  to  be 
very  much  like  each  other  which  are  not  so.  Whales, 
porpoises,  seals,  and  several  other  animals  live  in  the 
sea  exactly  like  a  fish ;  they  have  a  similar  shape  and  are 
usually  classed  among  fish.  People  are  said  to  go  whale 
fishing.  Yet  these  animals  are  not  really  fish  at  all, 
but  are  much  more  like  dogs  and  horses  and  other 
quadrupeds  than  they  are  like  fish.  They  cannot  live 
entirely  under  water  and  breathe  the  air  contained  in 
the  water  like  fish,  but  they  have  to  come  to  the  surface 
at  intervals  to  take  breath.  Similarly,  we  must  not 
class  bats  with  birds  because  they  fly  about,  although 
they  have  what  would  be  called  wings;  these  wings  are 
not  like  those  of  birds,  and,  in  truth,  bats  are  much 
more  like  rats  and  mice  than  they  are  like  birds.  Bot- 
anists used  at  one  time  to  classify  plants  according  to 
their  size,  as  trees,  shrubs,  or  herbs,  but  we  now  know 
that  a  great  tree  is  often  more  similar  in  character  to  a 
tiny  herb  than  it  is  to  other  great  trees.  A  daisy  has 
little  resemblance  to  a  great  Scotch  thistle;  yet  the 
botanist  regards  them  as  very  similar.  The  lofty  grow- 
ing bamboo  is  a  kind  of  grass,  and  the  sugar  cane  also 
belongs  to  the  same  class  with  wheat  and  oats.^^ 

It  is  a  matter  of  importance  that  clear  concepts  should 
be  formed  regarding  at  least  the  familiar  things  of  life. 
Tlie  list  of  clear  concepts  should  be  added  to.  from  time. 


163    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

to  time  by  study,  investigation,  and  examination.  The 
dictionary  should  be  consulted  frequently,  and  a  term 
studied  until  one  has  a  clear  meaning  of  the  concept 
the  term  seeks  to  express.  A  good  encyclopedia  (not 
necessarily  an  expensive  one,  in  these  days  of  cheap 
editions)  will  also  prove  very  useful  in  this  respect. 
As  Halleck  says :  ^^It  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  most 
of  our  concepts  are  subject  to  change  during  our  entire 
life ;  that  at  first  they  are  made  only  in  a  tentative  way ; 
that  experience  may  show  us,  at  any  time,  that  they 
have  been  erroneously  formed,  that  we  have  abstracted 
too  little  or  too  much,  made  the  class  too  wide  or  too 
narrow,  or  that  here  a  quality  must  be  added  or  there 
one  taken  away.^^ 

It  is  a  good  practice  to  make  a  memorandum  of  any- 
thing of  which  you  may  hear,  but  of  which  you  know 
nothing,  and  then  later  to  make  a  brief  but  thorough 
investigation  of  that  thing,  by  means  of  the  dictionary 
and  encyclopedia,  and  of  whatever  good  works  may  be 
obtained  on  the  subject,  not  leaving  it  until  you  feel 
that  you  have  obtained  at  least  a  clear  idea  of  what 
the  thing  really  means,  A  half  hour  each  evening  de- 
voted to  exercise  of  this  kind  will  result  in  a  wonderful 
increase  of  general  information.  We  have  heard  of  a 
man  who  made  a  practice  of  reading  a  short  article 
in  the  encyclopedia  every  evening,  giving  preference  to 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    163 

subjects  generally  classed  as  familiar.  In  a  year  he 
made  a  noticeable  advance  in  general  knowledge  as  well 
as  habits  of  thought.  In  five  years  he  was  looked  upon 
by  his  associates  as  a  man  of  a  remarkably  large  field 
of  general  information  and  of  more  than  ordinary  intel- 
ligence, which  verdict  was  a  just  one.  As  a  rule  we 
waste  far  more  time  on  worthless  fiction  than  we  are 
willing  to  devote  to  a  little  self-improvement  of  this 
kind.  We  shrink  at  the  idea  of  a  general  course  of 
instructive  reading,  little  realizing  that  we  can  take  our 
study  in  small  installments  and  at  a  very  little  cost  in 
time  or  labor. 

Our  concepts  form  the  material  which  our  intellect 
uses  in  its  reasoning  processes.  No  matter  how  good 
a  reasoner  one  may  be,  unless  he  has  a  good  supply  of 
general  information  about  the  things  of  which  he  is 
reasoning,  he  will  not  make  much  real  headway.  We 
must  begin  at  the  bottom  and  build  a  firm  foundation 
upon  which  the  intellectual  structure  may  be  erected. 
This  foundation  is  composed  of  facts.  These  facts  are 
represented  by  our  clear  and  correct  concepts. 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 
Judgments. 

WE  have  seen  the  several  steps  of  the  mental 
process  whereby  simple  sensations  are  trans- 
formed into  percepts  and  then  into  con- 
cepts or  general  ideas.  The  formation  of  the  concept 
is  considered  as  the  first  great  step  in  thinking.  The 
second  great  step  in  thinking  is  that  of  the  formation 
of  the  ^^judgment.^'  The  definition  of  ^^jndgment/^  as 
the  term  is  used  in  logicj  is  ^^the  comparing:  togetherjin 
the  mind  of  two  ideas  of  things^  and  determining 
whether  they  agree  or  disagre^ejwith  each  ^thejr^  or  that 
one  of  them  does  or  does  not  belong  to  the  other.  Judg- 
ment is,  therefore,  (a)  affirmative  or  (6)  negative,  as 
(a)  ^Snow  is  white,'  or  (&)  ^AU  white  men  are  not 
Europeans/  '^ 

What  in  logic  is  called  a  ^^proposition''  is  the  ex- 
pression in  words  of  a  logical  judgment.  Hyslop 
defined  the  term  ^^proposition"  as  follows:  ^^Any 
affirmation  or  denial  of  an  agreement  between  two  con- 
ceptions." For  instance,  we  compare  the  concepts 
^^sparrow"  and  "bird"  and  find  that  there  is  an  agree- 
ment, and  that  the  former  belongs  to  the  latter;  this 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    165 

mental  process  is  a  judgment.  We  then  announce  the 
judgment  in  the  proposition:  ^^The  sparrow  is  a  bird/' 
In  the  same  way  we  compare  the  concepts  ^^bat'^  and 
"bird/'  find  that  there  is  a  disagreement,  and  form  the 
judgment  that  neither  belongs  to  the  other,  which  we 
express  in  the  proposition:  "The  bat  is  not  a  bird/' 
Or  we  may  form  the  judgment  that  "sweetness"  is  a 
quality  of  "sugar/'  which  we  express  in  the  proposi- 
tion: "Sugar  is  sweet."  Likewise,  we  may  form  the 
judgment  which  results  in  the  proposition:  "Vinegar 
is  not  sweet." 

While  the  process  of  judgment  is  generally  consideredr 
as  constituting  the  second  great  step  of  thinking,  com- 
ing after  the  formation  of  the  concept,  and  consisting 
of  the  comparing  of  concepts,  it  must  be  remembered 
that  the  act  of  judging  is  far  more  elementary  than 
this,  for  it  is  found  still  farther  back  in  the  history  of 
thought  processes.  By  that  peculiar  law  of  paradox 
which  we  find  everywhere  operative  in  mind  processes, 
the  same  process  of  forming  judgments  which  is  used 
in  comparing  concepts  also  has  been  used  in  forming 
the  same  concepts  in  the  stage  of  comparison.  In  fact, 
the  result_of  all  comparison^^iigh  or  low,  must  be  a 
judgment. 

Halleck  says:  "Judgment  is  necessary  in  forming 
concepts.     When  we  decide  that  a  quality  is  or  is  not 


166    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

common  to  a  class,  we  are  really  judging.  This  is  an- 
other evidence  of  the  complexity  and  unified  action  of 
the  mind/'  Brooks  says:  ^^The  power  of  judgment 
is  of  great  value  in  its  products.  It  is  involved  in  or 
accompanies  every  act  of  the  intellect,  and  thus  lies  at 
the  foundation  of  all  intellectual  activity.  It  operates 
directly  in  every  act  of  the  understanding,  and  even 
aids  the  other  faculties  of  the  mind  in  completing  their 
activities  and  products.  *  *  *  Strictly  speaking,  every 
intelligent  act  of  the  mind  is  accompanied  with  a  judg- 
ment. To  know  is  to  discriminate  and,  therefore,  to 
judge.  Every  sensation  or  cognition  involves  a  knowl- 
edge and  so  a  judgment  that  it  exists.  The  mind  can- 
not think  at  all  without  judging;  to  think  is  to  judge. 
Even  in  forming  the  notions  which  judgment  com- 
pares, the  mind  judges.  Every  notion  or  concept  im- 
plies a  previous  act  of  judgment  to  form  it;  in  forming 
a  concept  we  compare  the  common  attributes  before  we 
unite  them,  and  comparison  is  judgment.  It  is  thus 
true  that  ^Every  concept  is  a  contracted  judgment; 
every  judgment  an  expanded  concept.^  '^ 

It  is  needless  to  say  that  as  judgments  lie  at  the  base 
of  our  thinking,  and  also  appear  in  every  part  of  its 
higher  structure,  the  importance  of  correct  judgment 
in  thought  cannot  be  overestimated.  But  it  is  often 
very  difficult  to  form  correct  judgment  even  regarding 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.     167 

the  most  familiar  things  around  us.  Halleck  says :  "In 
actual  life  things  present  themselves  to  us  with  their 
qualities  disguised  or  obscured  by  other  conflicting 
qualities.  Men  had  for  ages  seen  burning  substances 
and  had  formed  a  concept  of  them.  A  certain  hard, 
black,  stony  substance  had  often  been  noticed,  and  a 
concept  had  been  formed  of  it.  This  concept  was  im- 
perfect ;  but  it  is  very  seldom  that  we  meet  with  perfect, 
sharply-defined  concepts  in  actual  life.  So  it  happened 
that  for  ages  the  concept  of  burning  substance  was 
never  linked  by  judgment  to  the  concept  of  stone  coal. 
The  combustible  quality  in  the  coal  was  overshadowed 
by  its  stony  attributes.  ^Of  course  stone  will  not  burn,^ 
people  said.  One  cannot  tell  how  long  the  development 
of  mankind  was  retarded  for  that  very  reason.  Eng- 
land would  not  to-day  be  manufacturing  products  for 
the  rest  of  the  world  had  not  some  one  judged  coal  to 
be  a  combustible  substance.  *  *  *  Judgment  is  ever 
silently  working  and  comparing  things  that  to  past 
ages  seemed  dissimilar;  and  it  is  constantly  abstracting 
and  leaving  out  of  the  field  of  view  those  qualities 
which  have  simply  served  to  obscure  the  point  at  issue.^^ 
Gordy  says:  "The  credulity  of  children  is  prover- 
bial; but  if  we  get  our  facts  at  first  hand,  if  we  study 
^the  living,  learning,  playing  child,^  we  shall  see  that  he 
is  quite  as  remarkable  for  incredulity  as  for  credulity. 


168    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

The  explanation  is  simple:  He  tends  to  lelieve  the 
first  suggestion  that  comes  into  his  mind,  no  matter 
from  what  source;  and  since  his  belief  is  not  the  result 
of  any  rational  process,  he  cannot  be  made  to  disbelieve 
it  in  any  rational  way.  Hence  it  is  that  he  is  very 
credulous  about  any  matter  about  which  he  has  no 
ideas;  but  let  the  idea  once  get  possession  of  his  mind, 
and  he  is  quite  as  remarkable  for  incredulity  as  before 
for  credulity.  *  *  *  If  we  study  the  larger  child, — ^the 
man  with  a  child's  mind,  an  uneducated  man, — we  shall 
have  the  same  truth  forced  upon  us.  If  the  beliefs  of 
men  were  due  to  processes  of  reasoning,  where  they  have 
not  reasoned  they  would  not  believe.  But  do  we  find 
it  so?  Is  it  not  true  that  the  men  who  have  the  most 
positive  opinions  on  the  largest  variety  of  subjects — so 
far  as  they  have  ever  heard  of  them — are  precisely  those 
who  have  the  least  right  to  them  ?  Socrates,  we  remem- 
ber, was  counted  the  wisest  man  in  Athens  because  he 
alone  resisted  his  natural  tendency  to  believe  in  the 
absence  of  evidence;  he  alone  would  not  delude  himself 
with  the  conceit  of  knowledge  without  the  reality;  and 
it  would  scarcely  be  too  much  to  say  that  the  intellectual 
strength  of  men  is  in  direct  proportion  to  the  number 
of  things  they  are  absolutely  certain  of .  *  *  *  I  do  not, 
of  course,  mean  to  intimate  that  we  should  have  no 
opinions   about  matters  that   we   have  not   personally 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    169 

investigated.  We  take,  and  ought  to  take,  the  opinion 
of  some  men  about  law,  and  others  about  medicine,  and 
others  about  particular  sciences,  and  so  on.  But  we 
should  clearly  realize  the  difference  between  holding  an 
opinion  on  trust  and  holding  it  as  the  result  of  our  own 
investigations.^^ 

Brooks  says:  '^It  should  be  one  of  the  leading  ob- 
jects of  the  culture  of  young  people  to  lead  them  to 
acquire  the  habit  of  forming  judgments.  They  should 
not  only  be  led  to  see  things  but  to  have  opinions  about 
things.  They  should  be  trained  to  see  things  in  their 
relations  and  to  put  these  relations  into  definite  propo- 
sitions. Their  ideas  of  objects  should  be  worked  up 
into  thoughts  concerning  the  objects.  Those  methods 
of  teaching  are  best  which  tend  to  excite  a  thoughtful 
habit  of  mind  that  notices  the  similitudes  and  diversi- 
ties of  objects  and  endeavors  to  read  the  thoughts  which 
they  embody  and  of  which  they  are  the  symbols.^' 

The  study  of  logic,  geometry,  and  the  natural  sci- 
ences is  recommended  for  exercise  of  the  faculty  of 
judgment  and  the  development  thereof.  The  study  and 
practice  of  even  the  lower  branches  of  mathematics  are 
also  helpful  in  this  direction.  The  game  of  checkers 
or  chess  is  recommended  by  many  authorities.  Some 
have  advocated  the  practice  of  solving  enigmas,  prob- 
lems, rebuses,  etc.,  as  giving  exercise  to  this  faculty  of 


170    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

the  mind.  The  cultivation  of  the  ^'Why?^'  attitude  of 
mind,  and  the  answering  of  one's  own  mental  questions, 
is  also  helpful,  if  not  carried  to  excess.  "Doubting 
Thomas''  is  not  always  a  term  of  reproach  in  these  days 
of  scientific  habits  of  thought,  and  "the  man  from 
Missouri"  has  many  warm  admirers. 


CHAPTEE  XXIV. 
Primary  Laws  of  Thought* 

IN  connection  with  this  subject  we  herewith  call  the 
attention  of  the  student  to  the  well-known  Pri- 
mary Laws  of  Thought  which  have  been  recog- 
nized as  valid  from  the  time  of  the  ancient  Greek 
logicians.  These  laws  are  self-evident,  and  are  uncon- 
tradictable.  They  arq  axiomatic.  Jevons  says  of  them : 
"Students  are  seldom  able  to  see  at  first  their  full 
meaning  and  importance.  All  arguments  may  be  ex- 
plained when  these  self-evident  laws  are  granted;  and 
it  is  not  too  much  to  say  that  the  whole  of  logic  will 
be  plain  to  those  who  will  constantly  use  these  laws  as 
their  key.^'  Here  are  the  Three  Primary  Laws  of 
Thought:— 

I.     Law  of  Identity.     "Whatever  is,  isf' 
II.    Law  of  Contradiction.     "Nothing  can  both  be 

and  not  be.^' 
III.    Law  of  Excluded  Middle.    "Everything  must 
either  be  or  not  be;  there   is  no   middle 
course.^^ 
I.    The  first  of  these  laws,  called  ''Tlie  Law  of  Iden- 
tity ^  informs  us  that  a  thing  is  always  itself,  no  mattei 


172    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

under  what  guise  or  form  it  is  perceived  or  may  present 
itself.  An  animal  is  always  a  bird  if  it  possesses  the 
general  characteristics  of  a  "bird/'  no  matter  whether  it 
exhibits  the  minor  characteristics  of  an  eagle,  a  wren, 
a  stork,  or  a  humming  bird.  In  the  same  way  a  whale 
is  a  mammal  because  it  possesses  the  general  character- 
istics of  a  mammal  notwithstanding  that  it  swims  in  the 
water  like  a  fish.  Also,  sweetness  is  always  sweetness, 
whether  manifested  in  sugar,  honey,  flowers,  or  products 
of  coal  tar.  If  a  thing  is  that  thing,  then  it  is,  and  it 
cannot  be  logically  claimed  that  it  is  not 

II.  The  second  of  these  laws,  called  ^'The  Law  of 
Contradiction/'  informs  us  that  the  same  quality  or 
class  cannot  be  both  affirmed  and  denied  of  a  thing  at 
the  same  time  and  place.  A  sparrow  cannot  be  said  to 
be  both  "bird''  and  "not  bird"  at  the  same  time.  Neither 
can  sugar  be  said  to  be  "sweet"  and  "not  sweet'^  at  the 
same  time.  A  piece  of  iron  may  be  "hot"  at  one  end 
and  "not  hot"  at  another,  but  it  cannot  be  both  'Tiot" 
and  "not  hot"  at  the  same  place  at  the  same  time. 

III.  The  third  of  these  laws,  called  ''The  Law  of 
Excluded  Middle/'  informs  us  that  a  given  quality  or 
class  must  be  affirmed  or  denied  to  everything  at  any 
given  time  and  place.  Everything  either  must  be  of  a 
certain  class  or  not,  must  possess  a  certain  quality  or 
not,  at  a  given  time  or  place.     There  is  no  other  alter- 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    173 

native  or  middle  course.  It  is  axiomatic  that  any  state- 
ment mitst  either  be  or  not  be  true  of  a  certain  other 
thing  at  any  certain  time  and  place;  there  is  no  escape 
from  this.  Anything  either  must  be  ^T)lack^^  or  *^not 
black/^  a  bird  or  not  a  bird,  alive  or  not  alive,  at  any 
certain  time  or  place.  There  is  nothing  else  that  it  can 
be;  it  cannot  both  be  and  not  be  at  the  same  time  and 
place,  as  we  have  seen;  therefore,  it  must  either  be  or 
not  be  that  which  is  asserted  of  it.  The  judgment  must 
decide  which  alternative;  but  it  has  only  two  possible 
choices. 

But  the  student  must  not  confuse  opposite  qualities 
or  things  with  ^^not-ness.^^  A  thing  may  be  "black''  or 
"not  black,''  but  it  need  not  be  white  to  be  "not  black," 
for  blue  is  likewise  "not  black"  just  as  it  is  "not  white." 
The  neglect  of  this  fact  frequently  causes  error.  We 
must  always  affirm  either  the  existence  or  non-existence 
of  a  quality  in  a  thing;  but  this  is  far  different  from 
affirming  or  denying  the  existence  of  the  opposite  qual- 
ity. Thus  a  thing  may  be  "not  hard"  and  yet  it  does 
not  follow  that  it  is  "soft" ;  it  may  be  neither  hard  nor 
soft. 

Fallacious  Application. 

There  exists  what  are  known  as  "fallacies"  of  appli- 
cation of  these  primary  laws.  A  fallacy  is  an  unsound 
argument  or  conclusion.     For  instance,  because  a  par- 


174    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

m 

ticular  man  is  found  to  be  a  liar,  it  is  fallacious  to 
assume  that  ''all  men  are  liars/'  for  lying  is  a  particular 
quality  of  the  individual  man,  and  not  a  general  quality 
of  the  family  of  men.  In  the  same  way  because  a  stork 
has  long  legs  and  a  long  bill,  it  does  not  follow  that  all 
birds  must  have  these  characteristics  simply  because  the 
stork  is  a  bird.  It  is  fallacious  to  extend  an  individual 
quality  to  a  class.  But  it  is  sound  judgment  to  assume 
that  a  class  quality  must  be  possessed  by  all  individuals 
in  that  class.  It  is  a  far  different  proposition  which 
asserts  that  ''some  birds  are  black/'  from  that  which 
asserts  that  "all  birds  are  black."  The  same  rule,  of 
course,  is  true  regarding  negative  propositions. 

Another  fallacy  is  that  which  assumes  that  because 
the  affirmative  or  negative  proposition  has  not  been,  or 
cannot  be,  proved,  it  follows  that  the  opposite  proposi- 
tion must  be  true.  The  true  judgment  is  simply  "not 
proven.^' 

Another  fallacious  judgment  is  that  which  is  based 
on  attributing  absolute  quality  to  that  which  is  but 
relative  or  comparative.  For  instance,  the  terms  "hot'' 
and  "cold"  are  relative  and  comparative,  and  simply 
denote  one's  relative  opinion  regarding  a  fixed  and  cer- 
tain degree  of  temperature.  The  certain  thing  is  the 
degree  of  temperature,  say  75  degrees  Fahrenheit;  of 
this  we  may  logically  claim  that  it  is  or  is  not  true  at 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    175 

a  certain  time  or  place.  It  either  is  75  degrees  Fahren- 
heit or  it  is  not.  But  to  one  man  this  may  seem  warm 
and  to  another  cold;  both  are  right  in  their  judgments, 
so  far  as  their  own  relative  feelings  are  concerned. 
But  neither  can  claim  absolutely  that  it  is  warm  or 
cold.  Therefore,  it  is  a  fallacy  to  ascribe  absolute  qual- 
ity to  a  relative  one.  The  absolute  fact  comes  under 
the  Law  of  Excluded  Middle,  but  a  personal  opinion  is 
not  an  absolute  fact. 

There  are  other  fallacies  which  will  be  considered  in 
other  chapters  of  this  book,  under  their  appropriate 
heading. 


CHAPTEE  XXV.  . 

Reasoning. 

REASONING,  the  third  great  step  in  thinking, 
may  be  said  to  consist  of  ascertaining  new 
truths  from  old  ones,  new  judgments  from  old 
ones,  unknown  facts  from  known  ones;  in  short,  of 
proceeding  logically  from  the  known  to  the  unknown, 
using  the  known  as  the  foundation  for  the  unknown 
which  is  sought  to  be  known.  Gordy  gives  us  the  fol- 
lowing excellent  definition  of  the  term:  ^^Eeasoning 
is  the  act  of  going  from  the  known  to  the  unknown 
through  other  beliefs;  of  basing  judgment  upon  judg- 
ments ;  reaching  beliefs  through  beliefs/^  Reasoning, 
V  tjien,  is  seen  to  be  a  process^  of  J)uildingji  structure  of 
judgments^^ne^  resting  upon  Jhe  other,  the  topmost 
point  being  the  final  judgment,  but  the  whole_consti- 
tuting  an  edifice  of  judgment.  This  may  be  seen  more 
clearly  when  the  various  forms  of  reasoning  are  con- 
sidered. 
^  Immediate  Reasoning. 

The  simplest  form  of  reasoning  is  that  known  as 
^^immediate  reasoning,'^  by  which  is  meant  reasoning 
by  directly  comparing  two  judgments  without  the  inter- 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    177 

vention  of  the  third  judgment,  which  is  found  in  the 
more  formal  classes  of  reasoning.  This  form  of  rea- 
soning depends  largely  upon  the  application  of  the  Three 
Primary  Laws  of  Thought,  to  which  we  have  referred 
in  a  previous  chapter. 

It  will  be  seen  that  if  (a)  a  thing  is  always  itself, 
then  (b)  all  that  is  included  in  it  must  partake  of  its 
nature.  Thus,  the  bird  family  has  certain  class  charac- 
teristics, therefore  by  immediate  reasoning  we  know  that 
any  member  of  that  family  must  possess  those  class 
characteristics,  whatever  particular  characteristics  it 
may  have  in  addition.  And  we  likewise  know  that  we 
cannot  attribute  the  particular  characteristics,  as  a 
matter  of  course,  to  the  other  members  of  the  class. 
Thus,  though  all  sparrows  are  birds,  it  is  not  true  that 
all  birds  are  sparrows.  ^^AU  biscuits  are  bread ;  but  all 
bread  is  not  biscuit.'^ 

In  the  same  way  we  know  that  a  thing  cannot  be 
bird  and  mammal  at  the  same  time,  for  the  mammals 
form  a  not-bird  family.  And,  likewise,  we  know  that 
everything  must  be  either  bird  or  not  bird,  but  that 
being  not  bird  does  not  mean  being  a  mammal,  for 
there  are  many  other  not-bird  things  than  mammals. 
In  this  form  of  reasoning  distinction  is  always  made 
between  the  universal  or  general  class,  which  is  ex- 
pressed by  the  word  all,  and  the  particular  or  individual. 


178     YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

which  is  expressed  by  the  word  ^^some/^  Many  persons 
fail  to  note  this  difference  in  their  reasoning,  and  fal- 
laciously reason,  for  instance,  that  because  some  swans 
are  white,  all  swans  must  be  so,  which  is  a  far  different 
thing  from  reasoning  that  if  all  is  so  and  so,  then  some 
must  be  so  and  so.  Those  who  are  interested  in  this 
subject  are  referred  to  some  elementary  text-book  on 
logic,  as  the  detailed  consideration  is  too  technical  for 
consideration  here. 

Eeasoning  by  Analogy. 

Eeasoning  by  analogy  is  an  elementary  form  of  rea- 
soning, and  is  the  particular  kind  of  reasoning  em- 
ployed by  the  majority  of  persons  in  ordinary  thought.  ^ 
It  is  based  upon  the  unconscious  recognition  by  the 
human  mind  of  the  principle  which  is  expressed  by 
Jevons  as :  ''If  two  or  more  things  resemble  each  other 
in  many  points^  they  will  proiaily  resemble  each  other 
in  more  points/'  The  same  authority  says :  "Eeasoning 
by  analogy  differs  only  in  degree  from  that  kind  of 
reasoning  called  'generalization/  When  many  things 
resemble  each  other  in  a  few  properties,  we  argue  about 
them  by  generalization.  When  a  few  things  resemble 
each  other  in  many  properties,  it  is  a  case  of  analogy .^^ 

While   this  form  of  reason  is  frequently  employed 
with  more  or  less  satisfactory  results,  it  is  always  open 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    179 

to  a  large  percentage  of  error.  Thus,  persons  have  been 
poisoned  by  toadstools  by  reason  of  false  analogous  rea- 
soning that  because  mushrooms  are  edible,  then  toad- 
stools, which  resemble  them,  must  also  be  fit  for  food; 
or,  in  the  same  way,  because  certain  berries  resemble 
other  edible  berries  they  must  likewise  be  good  food. 
As  Brooks  says:  ^^To  infer  that  because  John  Smith 
has  a  red  nose  and  is  also  a  drunkard,  then  Henry  Jones, 
who  also  has  a  red  nose,  is  also  a  drunkard,  would  be 
dangerous  inference.  Conclusions  of  this  kind  drawn 
from  analogy  are  frequently  dangerous.^'  Halleck  says : 
"Many  false  analogies  are  manufactured,  and  it  is  ex- 
cellent thought  training  to  expose  them.  The  majority 
of  people  think  so  little  that  they  swallow  these  false 
analogies  just  as  newly-fledged  robins  swallow  small 
stones  dropped  into  their  mouths.^^ 

Jevons,  one  of  the  best  authorities  on  the  subject, 
says :  "There  is  no  way  in  which  we  can  really  assure 
ourselves  that  we  are  arguing  safely  by  analogy.  The 
only  rule  that  can  be  given  is  this :  That  the  more 
closely  two  things  resemble  each  other,  the  more  likely 
it  is  that  they  are  the  same  in  other  respects,  especially 
in  points  closely  connected  with  those  observed.  In 
order  to  be  clear  about  our  conclusions,  we  ought,  in 
fact,  never  to  rest  satisfied  with  mere  analogy,  but 
ought  to  try  to  discover  the  general  laws  governing  the 


180    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT, 

case.  *  *  *  We  find  that  reasoning  by  analogy  is  not 
to  be  depended  upon,  unless  we  make  such  an  inquiry 
into  the  causes  and  laws  of  the  things  in  question  that 
we  really  employ  inductive  and  deductive  reasoning." 

Higher  Forms  of  Keasoning. 

The  two  higher  forms  of  xeMQ2iing_-axe--known^-re- 
spectJrely^AS^  _^)__inductive  reasoning,  or  inference  irom 
particular  facts  to  general  laws  :_and  (2)  deductive  rea- 
soning^^r  inference  from  general  truths  to  particular 
truths.  While  the  class  distinction  is  made  for  the 
purpose  of  clear  consideration,  it  must  not  be  forgotten 
that  the  two  forms  of  reasoning  are  generally  found  in 
combination.  Thus,  in  inductive  reasoning  many  steps 
are  taken  by  the  aid  of  deductive  reasoning;  and,  like- 
wise, before  we  can  reason  deductively  from  general 
truths  to  particular  ones  we  must  have  discovered  the 
general  truths  by  inductive  reasoning  from  particular 
facts.  Thus  there  is  a  unity  in  all  reasoning  processes 
as  there  is  in  all  mental  operations.  Inductive  reasoning 
is  a  synthetical  process;  deductive  reasoning,  an  an- 
alytical one.  In  the  first  we  combine  and  build  up,  in 
the  latter  we  dissect  and  separate. 


CHAPTEE  XXVI. 

Inductive  Reasoning. 

INDUCTIVE  reasoning  is  based  upon  the  axiom: 
''Wliat  is  true  of  the  many  is  true  of  the  whole/' 
This  axiom  is  based  upon  man^s  belief  in  the 
uniformity  of  nature.  Inductive  reasoning  is  a  mental 
ladder  by  which  we  climb  from  particular  facts  to  gen-  "^ 
eral  laws,  but  the  ladder  rests  upon  the  belief  that  the 
universe  is  governed  by  law. 

The  steps  in  inductive  reasoning  are  as  follows : — 
I.  Observation,  investigation,  and  examination  of  >v^ 
particular  facts  or  things.  If  we  wish  to  know  the 
general  characteristics  of  the  bird  family,  we  must  first 
examine  a  sufficient  number  of  birds  of  many  kinds  bo 
as  to  discover  the  comparatively  few  general  character- 
istics possessed  by  all  of  the  bird  family,  as  distinct 
from  the  particular  characteristics  possessed  by  only 
some  of  that  family.  The  greater  the  number  of  indi- 
viduals examined,  the  narrower  becomes  our  list  of  the 
general  qualities  common  to  alh  In  the  same  way  we 
must  examine  many  kinds  of  flowers  before  we  come 
to  the  few  general  qualities  common  to  all  flowers,  which 
we  combine  in  the  general  concept  of  ^''flower/^     The 


182    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

same,  of  course,  is  true  regarding  the  discovery  of  gen- 
eral laws  from  particular  facts.  We  examine  the  facts 
and  then  work  toward  a  general  law  which  will  explain 
them.  For  instance,  the  Law  of  Gravitation  was  dis- 
covered by  the  observation  and  investigation  of  the  fact 
that  all  objects  are  attracted  to  the  earth;  further  in- 
vestigation revealed  the  fact  that  all  material  objects 
are  attracted  to  each  other;  then  the  general  law  was 
discovered,  or,  rather,  the  hypothesis  was  advanced, 
was  found  to  explain  the  facts,  and  was  verified  by 
further  experiments  and  observation. 

II.  The  second  step  in  inductive  reasoning  is  the 
making  of  an  hypothesis.  An  hypothesis  is  a  proposition 
^^^  or  principle  assumed  as  a  possible  explanation  for  a  set 
*^r  class  of  facts.  It  is  regarded  as  a  "working  theory,^' 
which  must  be  examined  and  tested  in  connection  with 
the  facts  before  it  is  finally  accepted.  For  instance, 
after  the  observation  that  a  number  of  magnets  at- 
tracted steel,  it  was  found  reasonable  to  advance  the 
hypothesis  that  "all  magnets  attract  steel."  In  the 
same  way  was  advanced  the  hypothesis  that  "all  birds 
are  warm-blooded,  winged,  feathered,  oviparous  verte- 
brates." Subsequent  observation  and  experiment  estab- 
lished the  hypothesis  regarding  the  magnet,  and 
regarding  the  general  qualities  of  the  bird  family.  If 
a  single  magnet  had  been  found  which  did  not  attract 


YOUB  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    183 

steel,  then  the  hypothesis  would  have  fallen.  If  a  sin- 
gle bird  had  been  discovered  which  was  not  warm- 
blooded, then  that  quality  would  have  been  stricken 
from  the  list  of  the  necessary  characteristics  of  all 
birds. 

A  theory  is  merely  an  hypothesis  which  has  been  veri- 
fied or  established  by  continued  and  repeated  observa- 
tion, investigation,  and  experiment. 

Hypotheses  and  theories  arise  very  frequently  from 
the  subconscious  assimilation  of  a  number  of  particular 
facts  and  the  consequent  flashing  of  a  ^^great  guess,'^ 
or  ^^sacred  suspicion  of  the  truth,'^  into  the  conscious 
field  of  attention.  The  scientific  imagination  plays  an 
important  part  in  this  process.  There  is,  of  course,  a 
world  of  difference  between  a  "blind  guess^^  based  upon 
insufficient  data  and  a  "scientific  guess'^  resulting  from 
the  accumulation  of  a  vast  store  of  careful  and  accurate 
information.  As  Brooks  says:  "The  forming  of  an 
hypothesis  requires  a  suggestive  mind,  a  lively  fancy,  a 
philosophic  imagination  that  catches  a  glimpse  of  the 
idea  through  the  form  or  sees  the  law  standing  behind 
the  fact.^^  But  accepted  theories,  in  the  majority  of 
cases,  arise  only  by  testing  out  and  rejecting  many 
promising  hypotheses  and  finally  settling  upon  the  one 
which  best  answers  all  the  requirements  and  best  ex- 
plains the  facts.     As  an  authority  says :    "To  try  wrong 


184    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

guesses  is  with  most  persons  the  only  way  to  hit  upon 
right  ones/^ 

III.  Testing  the  hypothesis  by  deductive  reasoning 
is  the  third  step  in  inductive  reasoning.  This  test  is 
made  by  applying  the  hypothetical  principle  to  partic- 
ular facts  or  things ;  that  is,  to  follow  out  mentally  the 
hypothetical  principle  to  its  logical  conclusion.  This 
may  be  done  in  this  way :  "If  so  and  so  is  correct,  then 
it  follows  that  thus  and  so  is  true/^  etc.  If  the  con- 
clusion agrees  with  reason,  then  the  test  is  deemed 
satisfactory  so  far  as  it  has  gone.  But  if  the  result 
proves  to  be  a  logical  absurdity  or  inconsistent  with 
natural  facts,  then  the  hypothesis  is  discredited. 

IV.  Practical  verification  of  the  hypothesis  is  the 
fourth  step  in  inductive  reasoning.  This  step  consists 
of  the  actual  comparison  of  observed  facts  with  the 
"logical  conclusions'^  arising  from  applying  deductive 
reasoning  to  the  general  principle  assumed  as  a  premise. 
The  greater  number  of  facts  agreeing  with  the  conclu- 
sions arising  from  the  premise  of  the  hypothesis,  the 
greater  is  deemed  the  "probability'^  of  the  latter.  The 
authorities  generally  assume  an  hypothesis  to  be  verified 
when  it  accounts  for  all  the  facts  which  properly  are 
related  to  it.  Some  extremists  contend,  however,  that 
before  an  hypothesis  may  be  considered  as  absolutely 
verified,  it  must  not  only  account  for  all  the  associated 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    185 

facts  but  that  also  there  must  be  no  other  possible 
hypothesis  to  account  for  the  same  facts.  The  ^^facts^' 
referred  to  in  this  connection  may  be  either  (1)  ob- 
served phenomena,  or  (2)  the  conclusions  of  deductive 
reasoning  arising  from  the  assumption  of  the  hypoth- 
esis, or  (3)  the  agreement  between  the  observed  facts 
and  the  logical  conclusions.  The  last  combination  is 
generally  regarded  as  the  most  logical.  The  verifica- 
tion of  an  hypothesis  must  be  ^^an  all-around  one/^  and 
there  must  be  an  agreement  between  the  observed  facts 
and  the  logical  conclusions  in  the  case — the  hypothesis 
must  ^^fit'''  the  facts,  and  the  facts  must  ^^fit'^  the 
hypothesis.  The  ^^facts'^  are  the  glass  slipper  of  the 
Cinderella  legend — the  several  sisters  of  Cinderella 
were  discarded  hypotheses,  the  slipper  and  the  sisters 
not  '^fitting/^  When  Cinderella's  foot  was  found  to  be 
the  one  foot  upon  which  the  glass  slipper  fitted,  then 
the  Cinderella  hypothesis  was  considered  to  have  been 
proved — the  glass  slipper  was  hers  and  the  prince 
claimed  his  bride. 


-r^ 


\ 


CHAPTER  XXVII. 

Deductive  Reasoning. 

WE  have  seen  in  the  preceding  chapter  that 
from  particular  facts  we  reason  inductively 
to  general  principles  or  truths.  We  have 
also  seen  that  one  of  the  steps  of  inductive  reasoning  is 
the  testing  of  the  hypothesis  by  deductive  reasoning. 
We  shall  now  also  see  that  the  results  of  inductive 
reasoning  are  used  as  premises  or  bases  for  deductive 
reasoning.  These  two  forms  of  reasoning  are  opposites 
and  yet  complementary  to  each  other;  they  are  in  a 
sense  independent  and  yet  are  interdependent.  Brooks 
says:  ^^The  two  methods  of  reasoning  are  the  reverse 
'l^  of  each  other.  One  goes  from  particulars  to  generals; 
the  other  from  generals  to  particulars.  One  is  a  proc- 
ess of  analysis ;  the  other  is  a  process  of  synthesis.  One 
rises  from  facts  to  laws;  the  other  descends  from  laws 
^to  facts.  Each  is  independent  of  the  other,  and  each 
is  a  valid  and  essential  method  of  inference.'^ 

Halleck  well  expresses  the  spirit  of  deductive  reason- 
ing as  follows :  ^^ After  induction  has  classified  certain 
phenomena  and  thus  given  us  a  major  premise,  we  may 
proceed  deductively  to  apply  the  inference  to  any  new 


/ 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    187 

specimen  that  can  be  shown  to  belong  to  that  class. 
Induction  hands  over  to  deduction  a  ready-made  prem- 
ise. Deduction  takes  that  as  a  fact,  making  no  inquiry 
regarding  its  truth.  Only  after  general  laws  have  been 
laid  down,  after  objects  have  been  classified,  after  major 
premises  have  been  formed,  can  deduction  be  employed.^^ 

Deductive  reasoning  proceeds  from  general  principles 
to  particular  facts.  It  is  a  descending  process,  an- 
alytical in  its  nature.  It  rests  upon  the  fundamental 
axiomatic  basis  that  ''whatever  is  true  of  the  whole  is 
true  of  its  parts/'  or  ''whatever  is  true  of  the  universal 
is  true  of  the  particulars/' 

The  process  of  deductive  reasoning  may  be  stated 
briefly  as  follows:  (1)  A  general  principle  of  a  class 
is  stated  as  a  major  premise;  (2)  a  particular  thing  is 
stated  as  belonging  to  that  general  class,  this  statement 
being  the  minor  premise;  therefore  (3)  the  general 
class  principle  is  held  to  apply  to  the  particular  thing, 
this  last  statement  being  the  conclusion.  (A  "premise'^ 
is  "a  proposition  assumed  to  he  true/') 

The  following  gives  us  an  illustration  of  the  above 
process : — 

I.     {/Major  premise) — ^A  bird  is  a  warm-blooded, 

feathered,  winged,  oviparous  vertebrate, 
II.     {/Minor   premise) — The    sparrow    is    a    bird; 
therefore 


188    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

III.     (Conclusion) — The  sparrow  is  a  warm-blooded, 

feathered,  winged,  oviparous  vertebrate. 
Or,  again: — 
I.     (Major  premise) — Rattlesnakes  frequently  bite 

when  enraged,  and  their  bite  is  poisonous. 
II.     (Minor  premise) — This  snake  before  me  is  a 

rattlesnake;  therefore 
III.  (Conclusion) — This  snake  before  me  may  bite 
when  enraged,  and  its  bite  will  be  poisonous. 
The  average  person  may  be  inclined  to  object  that 
he  is  not  conscious  of  going  through  this  complicated 
process  when  he  reasons  about  sparrows  or  rattlesnakes. 
But  he  does,  nevertheless.  He  is  not  conscious  of  the 
steps,  because  mental  habit  has  accustomed  him  to  the 
process,  and  it  is  performed  more  or  less  automatically. 
But  these  three  steps  manifest  in  all  processes  of  de- 
ductive reasoning,  even  the  simplest.  The  average  per- 
son is  like  the  character  in  the  French  play  who  was 
surprised  to  learn  that  he  had  ^^been  talking  prose  for 
forty  years  without  knowing  it.^^  Jevons  says  that  the 
majority  of  persons  are  equally  surprised  when  they 
find  out  that  they  have  been  using  logical  forms,  more 
or  less  correctly,  without  having  realized  it.  He  says: 
"A  large  number  even  of  educated  persons  have  no  clear 
idea  of  what  logic  is.  Yet,  in  a  certain  way,  every  one 
must  have  been  a  logician  since  he  began  to  speak.^^ 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    189 

There  are  many  technical  rules  and  principles  of 
logic  which  we  cannot  attempt  to  consider  here.  There 
are,  however,  a  few  elementary  principles  of  correct 
reasoning  which  should  have  a  place  here.  What  is 
known  as  a  ^^syllogism^^  is  the  expression  in  words  of 
the  various  parts  of  the  complete  process  of  reasoning 
or  argument.  Whately  defines  it  as  follows:  ^^A  syl- 
logism is  an  argument  expressed  in  strict  logical  form 
so  that  its  conclusiveness  is  manifest  from  the  struc- 
ture of  the  expression  alone,  without  any  regard  to  the 
meaning  of  the  term.'^  In  short,  if  the  two  premises 
are  accepted  as  correct,  it  follows  that  there  can  be  only 
one  true  logical  conclusion  resulting  therefrom.  In 
abstract  or  theoretical  reasoning  the  word  ''if  is  as- 
sumed to  precede  each  of  the  two  premises,  the  ^^there- 
fore^^  before  the  conclusion  resulting  from  the  "if,'^  of 
course.  The  following  are  the  general  rules  governing 
the  syllogism: — 

I.  Every  syllogism  must  consist  of  three,  and  no 
more  than  three,  propositions,  namely  (1)  the  major 
premise,  (2)  the  minor  premise,  and  (3)  the  conclu- 
sion. 

II.  The  conclusion  must  naturally  follow  from  the 
premises,  otherwise  the  syllogism  is  invalid  and  con- 
stitutes a  fallacy  or  sophism. 

III.  One  premise,  at  least,  must  be  affirmative. 


K 


190    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

IV.  If  one  premise  is  negative,  the  conclusion  must 
be  negative. 

V.  One  premise,  at  least,  must  be  universal  or  gen- 
eral. 

VI.  If  one  premise  is  particular,  the  conclusion  also 
must  be  particular. 

The  last  two  rules  (V.  and  VI.)  contain  the  essential 
principles  of  all  the  rules  regarding  syllogisms,  and  any 
syllogism  which  breaks  them  will  be  found  also  to  break 
other  rules,  some  of  which  are  not  stated  here  for  the 
reason  that  they  are  too  technical.  These  two  rules  may 
be  tested  by  constructing  syllogisms  in  violation  of  their 
principles.  The  reason  for  them  is  as  follows:  (Rule 
V.)  Because  ^^from  two  particular  premises  no  conclu- 
sion can  be  drawn,'^  as,  for  instance :  (1)  Some  men  are 
mortal;  (2)  John  is  a  man.  We  cannot  reason  from 
this  either  that  John  is  or  is  not  mortal.  The  major 
premise  should  read  ''all  men.^^  (Rule  VI.)  Because 
^^a  universal  conclusion  can  be  drawn  only  from  two 
universal  premises,^^  an  example  being  needless  here,  as 
the  conclusion  is  so  obvious. 

Cultivation  of  Reasoning  Faculties. 

There   is   no  royal  road  to  the  cultivation   of  thfe 

I  reasoning  faculties.     There  is  but  the  old  familiar  rule : 

/  Practice,  exercise,  use.„.  Nevertheless  there  are  certain 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.     191 

studies  which  tend  to  develop  the  faculties  in  question. 
The  study  of  arithmetic^  especially  mental  arithmetic, 
tends  to  develop  correct  habits  of  reasoning  from  one 
truth  to  another — from  cause  to  effect.  Better  still  is 
the  study  of  geometry;  and  best  of  all,  of  course,  is  the 
study  of  logic  and  the  practice  of  working  out  its  prob- 
lems and  examples.  The  study  of  philosophy  and  psy- 
chology also  is  useful  in  this  way.  Many  lawyers  and 
teachers  have  drilled  themselves  in  geometry  solely  for 
the  purpose  of  developing  their  logical  reasoning  powers. 
Brooks  says:  ^^So  valuable  is  geometry  as  a  disci- 
pline that  many  lawyers  and  others  review  their  geom- 
etry every  year  in  order  to  keep  the  mind  drilled  to 
logical  habits  of  thinking.  *  *  *  The  study  of  logic 
will  aid  in  the  development  of  the  power  of  deductive 
reasoning.  It  does  this,  first,  by  showing  the  method 
by  which  we  reason.  To  know  how  we  reason,  to  see 
the  laws  which  govern  the  reasoning  process,  to  analyze 
the  syllogism  and  see  its  conformity  to  the  laws  of 
thought,  is  not  only  an  exercise  of  reasoning  but  gives 
that  knowledge  of  the  process  that  will  be  both  a  stim- 
ulus and  a  guide  to  thought.  No  one  can  trace  the 
principles  and  processes  of  thought  without  receiving 
thereby  an  impetus  to  thought.  In  the  second  place, 
the  study  of  logic  is  probably  even  more  valuable  because 
it  gives  practice  in  deductive  thinking.     This,  perhaps, 


192     YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

is  its  principal  value,  since  the  mind  reasons  instinc- 
tively without  knowing  how  it  reasons.  One  can  think 
without  the  knowledge  of  the  science  of  thinking  just 
as  one  can  use  language  correctly  without  a  knowledge 
of  grammar;  yet  as  the  study  of  grammar  improves 
one^s  speech^  so  the  study  of  logic  can  but  improve  one^s 
thought/' 

In  the  opinion  of  the  writer  hereof^,  one  of  the  best 
though  simple  methods  of  cultivating  the  faculties  of 
reasoning  is  to  acquaint  one's  self  thoroughly  with  the 
more  common  fallacies  or  forms  of  false  reasoning — so 
thoroughly  that  not  only  is  the  false  reasoning  detected 
at  once  but  also  the  reason  of  its  falsity  is  readily 
understood.  To  understand  the  wrong  ways  of  reason- 
ing is  to  be  on  guard  against  them.  By  guarding 
against  them  we  tend  to  eliminate  them  from  our 
thought  processes.  If  we  eliminate  the  false  we  have 
the  true  left  in  its  place.  Therefore  we  recommend  the 
weeding  of  the  logical  garden  of  the  common  fallacies, 
to  the  end  that  the  flowers  of  pure  reason  may  flourish 
in  their  stead.  Accordingly,  we  think  it  well  to  call 
your  attention  in  the  next  chapter  to  the  more  common 
fallacies,  and  the  reason  of  their  falsity. 


A 


CHAPTER  XXVIII. 
Fallacious  Reasoning. 

FALLACY  is   defined  as  ^^an  unsound   argu- 
ment or  mode  of  arguing  which,  while  appear-  y" 
ing  to  be  decisive  of  a  question,  is  in  reality 


not  so ;  or  a  fallacious  statement  or  proposition  in  which 
the  error  is  not  readily  apparent.  When  a  fallacy  is 
used  to  deceive  others,  it  is  called  ^sophistry/  ^^  It  is 
important  that  the  student  should  understand  the  na- 
ture of  the  fallacy  and  understand  its  most  common 
forms.  As  Jevons  says :  "In  learning  how  to  do  right 
it  is  always  desirable  to  be  informed  as  to  the  ways  in 
which  we  are  likely  to  go  wrong.  In  describing  to  a 
man  the  road  which  he  should  follow,  we  ought  to  tell 
him  not  only  the  turnings  which  he  is  to  take  but  also 
the  turnings  which  he  is  to  avoid.  Similarly,  it  is  a 
useful  part  of  logic  which  teaches  us  the  ways  and 
turnings  by  which  people  most  commonly  go  astray  in 
reasoning.^^ 

In  presenting  the  following  brief  statement  regarding 
the  more  common  forms  of  fallacy,  we  omit  so  far  as 
possible  the  technical  details  which  belong  to  text-books 
on  logic. 


194    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

Fallacies. 
I.  True  Collective  but  False  Particular. — An  exam- 
ple of  this  fallacy  is  found  in  the  argument  that  because 
the  French  race,  collectively,  are  excitable,  therefore 
a  particular  Frenchman  must  be  excitable.  Or  that 
because  the  Jewish  race,  collectively,  are  good  busi- 
ness people,  therefore  the  particular  Jew  must  be  a 
good  business  man.  This  is  as  fallacious  as  arguing 
that  because  a  man  may  drown  in  the  ocean  he  should 
avoid  the  bath,  basin,  or  cup  of  water.  There  is  a  vast 
difference  between  the  whole  of  a  thing  and  its  separate 
parts.  Mtric  acid  and  glycerin,  separately,  -  are  not 
explosive,  but,  combined,  they  form  nitro-glycerin,  a 
most  dangerous  and  powerful  explosive.  Eeversing  this 
form  of  illustration,  we  remind  you  of  the  old  saying: 
''Salt  is  a  good  thing;  but  one  doesn't  want  to  be  put  in 
pickle/^ 

1  II.  Irrelevant  Conclusion. — This  fallacy  consists  in 
introducing  in  the  conclusion  matter  not  contained  in 
the  premises,  or  in  the  confusing  of  the  issue.  For 
instance:  (1)  All  men  are  sinful;  (2)  John  Smith  is 
a  man;  therefore  (3)  John  Smith  is  a  horse  thief. 
This  may  sound  absurd,  but  many  arguments  are  as 
fallacious  as  this,  and  for  the  same  reason.  Or  an- 
other and  more  subtle  form:  (1)  All  thieves  are  liars; 
(2)  John  Smith  is  a  liar;  therefore  (3)  John  Smith 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    195 

is  a  thief.  The  first  example  arises  from  the  introduc- 
tion of  new  matter,  and  the  last  from  the  confusion  of 
the  issue. 

III.  False  Cause. — This  fallacy  consists  in  attrib- 
uting cause  to  a  thing  which  is  merely  coincident  with, 
or  precedent  to,  the  effect.  For  instance:  (1)  The 
cock  crows  just  before  or  at  the  moment  of  sunrise; 
therefore  (2)  the  cock-crowing  is  the  cause  of  the  sun- 
rise. Or,  again:  (1)  Bad  crops  followed  the  election 
of  a  Whig  president;  therefore  (2)  the  Whig  party  is 
the  cause  of  the  bad  crops.  Or,  again:  (1)  Where 
civilization  is  the  highest,  there  we  find  the  greatest 
number  of  high  hats;  therefore  (2)  high  hats  are  the 
cause  of  civilization. 

TV.  Circular  Reasoning,^ — In  this  form  of  fallacy 
the  person  reasoning  or  arguing  endeavors  to  explain 
or  prove  a  thing  by  itself  or  its  own  terms.  For  in- 
stance: (1)  The  Whig  party  is  honest  because  it  advo- 
cates honest  principles;  (2)  the  Whig  principles  are 
honest  because  they  are  advocated  by  an  honest  party. 
A  common  form  of  this  fallacy  in  its  phase  of  sophistry 
is  the  use  of  synonyms  in  such  a  manner  that  they  seem 
to  express  more  than  the  original  conception,  whereas 
they  are  really  but  other  terms  for  the  same  thing.  An 
historic  example  of  circular  reasoning  is  the  following: 
(1)  The  Church  of  England  is  the  true  Church,  because 


196    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

it  was  established  by  God;  (2)  it  must  have  been  estab- 
lished by  God,  because  it  is  the  true  Church.  This  form 
of  sophistry  is  most  effective  when  employed  in  long 
arguments  in  which  it  is  difficult  to  detect  it. 

V.  Begging  the  Question. — This  fallacy  arises  from 
the  use  of  a  false  premise,  or  at  least  of  a  premise  the 
truth  of  which  is  not  admitted  by  the  opponent.  It 
may  be  stated,  simply,  as  ^Hhe  unwarranted  assumption 
of  a  premise,  generally  the  major  premised  Many 
persons  in  public  life  argue  in  this  way.  They  boldly 
assert  an  unwarranted  premise,  and  then  proceed  to 
argue  logically  from  it.  The  result  is  confusing  to  the 
average  person,  for,  the  steps  of  the  reasoning  being 
logical,  it  seems  as  if  the  argument  is  sound,  the  fact 
of  the  unwarranted  premise  being  overlooked.  The 
person  using  this  form  of  sophistry  proceeds  on  Aaron 
Burr's  theory  of  truth  being  "that  which  is  boldly 
asserted  and  plausibly  maintained.'^ 

Bulwer  makes  one  of  his  characters  mention  a  par- 
ticularly atrocious  form  of  this  fallacy  (although  an 
amusing  one)  in  the  following  words :  "Whenever  you 
are  about  to  utter  something  astonishingly  false,  always 
begin  with:  ^It  is  an  acknowledged  fact,'  etc.  Sir 
Eobert  Filmer  was  a  master  of  this  manner  of  writing. 
Thus  with  what  a  solemn  face  that  great  man  attempted 
to  cheat.     He  would  say:     'It  is  a  truth  undeniable 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    197 

that  there  cannot  be  any  multitude  of  men  whatsoever, 
either  great  or  small,  etc.,  but  that  in  the  same  multi- 
tude there  is  one  man  among  them  that  in  nature  hath 
a  right  to  he  King  of  all  the  rest — as  being  the  next 
heir  of  Adam!*^* 

Look  carefully  for  the  major  premise  of  propositions 
advanced  in  argument,  spoken  or  written.  Be  sure  that 
the  person  making  the  proposition  is  not  "begging  the 
question^^  by  the  unwarranted  assumption  of  the  prem- 
ise. 

General  Eule  of  Inference. 

Hyslop  says  concerning  valid  inferences  and  fallacious 
ones:  ^We  cannot  infer  anything  we  please  from  any 
premises  we  please.  We  must  conform  to  certain  defi- 
nite rules  or  principles.  Any  violation  of  them  will  be 
a  fallacy.  There  are  two  simple  rules  which  should  not 
be  violated:  (1)  The  subject-matter  in  the  conclusion 
should  be  of  the  same  general  hind  as  in  the  premises; 
(2)  the  facts  constituting  the  premises  must  be  accepted 
and  must  not  be  fictitious."  A  close  observance  of  these 
rules  will  result  in  the  detection  and  avoidance  of  the 
principal  forms  of  fallacious  reasoning  and  sophistry. 

Sophistical  Arguments. 

There  are  a  number  of  tricky  practices  resorted  to  by 
persons  in  argument,  that  are  fallacious  in  intent  and 


198    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

result,  which  we  do  not  consider  here  in  detail  as  they 
scarcely  belong  to  the  particular  subject  of  this  book. 
A  brief  mention,  however,  may  be  permitted  in  the 
interest  of  general  information.  Here  are  the  principal 
ones : — 

(1)  Arguing  that  a  proposition  is  correct  because 
the  opponent  cannot  prove  the  contrary.  The  fallacy 
is  seen  when  we  realize  that  the  statement,  "The  moon 
is  made  of  green  cheese,^^  is  not  proved  because  we  can- 
not prove  the  contrary.  No  amount  of  failure  to  dis- 
prove  a  proposition  really  proves  it;  and  no  amount  of 
failure  to  prove  a  proposition  really  disproves  it.  As  a 
general  rule,  the  burden  of  proof  rests  upon  the  person 
stating  the  proposition,  and  his  opponent  is  not  called 
upon  to  disprove  it  or  else  have  it  considered  proved. 
The  old  cry  of  "You  cannot  prove  that  it  is  not  so'' 
is  based  upon  a  fallacious  conception. 

(2)  Abuse  of  the  opponent,  his  party,  or  his  cause. 
This  is  no  real  argument  or  reasoning.  It  is  akin  to 
proving  a  point  by  beating  the  opponent  over  the  head. 

(3)  Arguing  that  an  opponent  does  not  live  up  to 
his  principles  is  no  argument  against  the  principles  he 
advocates.  A  man  may  advocate  the  principle  of  tem- 
perance and  yet  drink  to  excess.  This  simply  proves 
that  he  preaches  better  than  he  practices ;  but  the  truth 
of  the  principle  of  temperance  is  not  aifected  in  any 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    199 

way  thereby.  The  proof  of  this  is  that  he  may  change 
his  practices ;  and  it  cannot  be  held  that  the  change  of 
his  personal  habits  improves  or  changes  the  nature  of 
the  principle. 

(4)  Argument  of  authority  is  not  based  on  logic. 
Authority  is  valuable  when  really  worthy,  and  merely 
as  corroboration  or  adding  weight;  but  it  is  not  logical 
argument.  The  reasons  of  the  authority  alone  consti- 
tute a  real  argument.  The  abuse  of  this  form  of  argu- 
ment is  shown,  in  the  above  reference  to  "begging  the 
question/^  in  the  quotation  from  Bulwer. 

(5)  Appeal  to  prejudice  or  public  opinion  is  not  a 
valid  argument,  for  public  opinion  is  frequently  wrong 
and  prejudice  is  often  unwarranted.  And,  at  the  best, 
they  "have  nothing  to  do  with  the  case^^  from  the  stand- 
point of  logic.  The  abuse  of  testimony  and  claimed 
evidence  is  also  worthy  of  examination,  but  we  cannot 
go  into  the  subject  here. 

Fallacies  of  Prejudice. 

But  perhaps  the  most  dangerous  of  all  fallacies  in 
the  search  for  truth  on  the  part  of  the  most  of  us  are 
those  which  arise  from  the  following: — 

(1)  The  tendency  to  reason  from  what  we  feel  and 
wish  to  be  true,  rather  than  from  the  actual  facts  of  the 
case,  which  causes  us  unconsciously  to  assume  the  men- 


200    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

tal  attitude  of  ^^if  the  facts  agree  with  our  likes  and 
pet  theories,  all  is  well;  if  they  do  not,  so  much  the 
worse  for  the  facts/' 

(2)  The  tendency  in  all  of  us  to  perceive  only  the 
facts  that  agree  with  our  theories  and  to  ignore  the 
others.  We  find  that  for  which  we  seek,  and  overlook 
that  which  does  not  interest  us.  Our  discoveries  fol- 
low our  interest,  and  our  interest  follows  our  desires 
and  beliefs. 

The  intelligent  man  or  woman  realizes  these  tenden- 
cies of  human  nature  and  endeavors  to  avoid  them  in 
his  or  her  own  reasoning,  but  is  keenly  conscious  of 
them  in  the  arguments  and  reasoning  of  others.  A 
failure  to  observe  and  guard  one's  self  against  these 
tendencies  results  in  bigotry,  intolerance,  narrowness, 
and  intellectual  astigmatism. 


CHAPTER  XXIX. 

The  Will. 

THE  activities  of  the  will  comprise  the  third  great 
class  of  mental  processes.  Psychologists  always 
have  differed  greatly  in  their  conception  of  just 
what  constitutes  these  activities.  Even  to-day  it  is  diffi- 
cult to  obtain  a  dictionary  definition  of  the  will  that 
agrees  with  the  best  opinion  on  the  subject.  The  dic- 
tionaries adhere  to  the  old  classification  and  conception 
which  regarded  the  will  as  ^*^that  faculty  of  the  mind 
or  soul  by  which  it  chooses  or  decides.^'  But  with 
the  growth  of  the  idea  that  the  will  acts  according  to  the 
strongest  motive^  and  that  the  motive  is  supplied  by  the 
average  struck  between  the  desires  of  the  moment,  un- 
der the  supervision  of  the  intellect,  the  conception  of 
will  as  the  choosing  and  deciding  faculty  is  passing  from 
favor.  In  the  place  of  the  older  conception  has  come 
the  newer  one  which  holds  that  the  will  is  primarily 
concerned  with  action. 

It  is  difficult  to  place  the  will  in  the  category  of 
mental  processes.  But  it  is  generally  agreed  that  it 
abides  in  the  very  center  of  the  mental  being,  and  is 
closely  associated  with  what  is  called  the  ego,  or  self. 


203     YOUB  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

The  will  seems  to  have  at  least  three  general  phases, 
viz.:  (1)  The  phase  of  desire,  (2)  the  phase  of  delib- 
eration or  choice,  and  (3)  the  phase  of  expression  in 
action.  In  order  to  understand  the  will,  it  is  necessary 
to  consider  each  of  these  three  phases  of  its  activities. 

(1).    Desire. 

The  first  phase  of  will,  which  is  called  ^^desire,^^  is  in 
itself  somewhat  complex.  On  its  lower  side  it  touches, 
and,  in  fact,  blends  into,  feeling  and  emotion.  Its  cen- 
ter consists  of  a  state  of  tension,  akin  to  that  of  a  coiled 
spring  or  a  cat  crouching  ready  for  a  spring.  On  its 
higher  side  it  touches,  penetrates,  and  blends  into  the 
other  phases  of  the  will  which  we  have  mentioned. 

Desire  is  defined  as  ^^a  feeling,  emotion,  or  excitement 
of  the  mind  directed  toward  the  attainment,  enjoyment, 
or  possession  of  some  object  from  which  pleasure,  profit, 
or  gratification  is  expected.^^  Halleck  gives  us  the  fol- 
lowing excellent  conception  of  the  moving  spirit  of 
desire :  ^'Desire  has  for  its  object  something  which  will 
bring  pleasure  or  get  rid  of  pain,  immediate  or  remote, 
for  the  individual  or  for  some  one  in  whom  he  is  inter- 
ested.  Aversion,  or  a  striving  away  from  something,  is 
merely  the  negative  aspect  of  desire/' 

In  Halleck^s  statement,  above  quoted,  we  have  the 
explanation  of  the  part  played  by  the  intellect  in  the  ac- 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    203 

tivities  of  will.  The  intellect  is  able  to  perceive  the 
relations  between  present  action  and  future  results,  and 
is  able  to  point  the  way  toward  the  suppression  of  some 
desires  in  order  that  other  and  better  ones  may  be  mani- 
fested. It  also  serves  its  purposes  in  regulating  the 
^^striking  of  the  average'^  between  conflicting  desires. 
Without  the  intervention  of  the  intellect^  the  temporary 
desire  of  the  moment  would  invariably  be  acted  upon 
without  regard  to  future  results  or  consequences  to  one's 
self  and  others.  It  also  serves  to  point  out  the  course 
of  action  calculated  to  give  the  most  satisfactory  expres- 
sion of  the  desire. 

While  it  is  a  fact  that  the  action  of  will  depends 
almost  entirely  upon  the  motive  force  of  desire,  it  is 
likewise  true  that  desire  may  be  created,  regulated,  sup- 
pressed, and  even  killed  by  the  action  of  the  will.  The 
will,  by  giving  or  refusing  attention  to  a  certain  class 
of  desires,  may  either  cause  them  to  grow  and  wax 
strong,  or  else  die  and  fade  away.  It  must  be  remem- 
bered, however,  that  this  use  of  the  will  itself  springs 
from  another  set  of  desires  or  feelings. 

Desire  is  aroused  by  feelings  or  emotions  rising  from 
the  subconscious  planes  of  the  mind  and  seeking  expres- 
sion and  manifestation.  We  have  considered  the  nature 
of  the  feelings  and  emotions  in  previous  chapters,  which 
should  be  read  in  connection  with  the  present  one.     It 


20 i    YOIJB  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

should  be  remembered  that  the  feeling  or  emotional  side 
of  desire  arises  from  either  inherited  race  memories 
existing  as  instincts,  or  from  the  memory  of  the 
past  experiences  of  the  individual.  In  some  eases  the 
feeling  first  manifests  in  a  vague  unrest  caused  by 
subconscious  promptings  and  excitement.  Then  the 
imagination  pictures  the  object  of  the  feeling,  or  certain 
memory  images  connected  with  it,  and  the  desire  thus 
manifests  on  the  plane  of  consciousness. 

The  entrance  of  the  desire  feeling  into  consciousness 
is  accompanied  by  that  peculiar  tension  which  marks 
the  second  phase  of  desire.  This  tension,  when  suffi- 
ciently strong,  passes  into  the  third  phase  of  desire,  or 
that  in  which  desire  blends  into  will  action.  Desire  in 
this  stage  makes  a  demand  upon  will  for  expression  and 
action.  From  mere  feeling,  and  tension  of  feeling,  it 
becomes  a  call  to  action.  But  before  expression  and 
action  are  given  to  it,  the  second  phase  of  will  must 
manifest  at  least  for  a  moment;  this  second  phase  is 
that  known  as  deliberation,  or  the  weighing  and  bal- 
ancing of  desires. 

( 2 ) .    Deliberation. 
The  second  phase  of  will,  known  as  deliberation,  is 
more  than  the  pu.rely  intellectual  process  which  the  term 
would  indicate.     The  intellect  plays  an  important  part. 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    205 

it  is  true,  but  there  is  also  an  almost  instinctive  and 
automatic  weighing  and  balancing  of  desires.  There  is 
seldom  only  one  desire  presenting  its  claims  upon  the 
will  at  any  particular  moment.  It  is  true  that  occa- 
sionally there  arises  an  emotional  desire  of  such  dom- 
inant power  and  strength  that  it  crowds  out  every  other 
claimant  at  the  bar  of  deliberation.  But  such  instances 
are  rare,  and  as  a  rule  there  are  a  host  of  rival  claim- 
ants, each  insisting  upon  its  rights  in  the  matter  at 
issue.  In  the  man  of  weak  or  undeveloped  and  un- 
trained intellect,  the  struggle  is  usually  little  more  than 
a  brief  combat  between  several  desires,  in  which  the 
strongest  at  the  moment  wins.  But  with  the  develop- 
ment of  intellect  new  factors  arise  and  new  forces  are 
felt.  Moreover,  the  more  complex  one's  emotional  na- 
ture, and  the  greater  the  development  of  the  higher 
forms  of  feeling,  the  more  intense  is  the  struggle  of 
deliberation  or  the  fight  of  the  desires. 

We  see,  in  Halleck's  definition,  that  desire  has  not 
only  the  object  of  "bringing  pleasure  or  getting  rid  of 
pain''  for  the  individual,  but  that  the  additional  element 
of  the  welfare  of  "some  one  in  whom  he  is  interested" 
is  added,  which  element  is  often  the  deciding  factor. 
This  element,  of  course,  arises  from  the  development 
and  cultivation  of  one's  emotional  nature.  In  the  same 
way  we  also  see  that  it  is  not  merely  the  immediate 


206     YOUB  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

welfare  of  one's  self  or  those  in  whom  one  is  interested 
that  speaks  before  the  bar,  but  also  the  more  remote 
welfare.  This  consideration  of  future  welfare  depends 
upon  the  intellect  and  cultivated  imagination  under  its 
control.  Moreover,  the  trained  intellect  is  able  to  dis- 
cover possible  greater  satisfaction  in  some  course  of 
action  other  than  in  the  one  prompted  by  the  clamoring 
desire  of  the  moment.  This  explains  why  the  judg- 
ment and  action  of  an  intelligent  man,  as  a  rule,  are  far 
different  from  those  of  the  unintelligent  one;  and  also 
why  a  man  of  culture  tends  toward  different  action  from 
that  of  the  uncultured;  and  likewise,  why  the  man  of 
broad  sympathies  and  high  ideals  acts  in  a  different  way 
from  one  of  the  opposite  type.  But  the  principle  is  ever 
the  same — the  feelings  manifest  in  desire,  the  greatest 
ultimate  satisfaction  apparent  at  the  moment  is  sought, 
and  the  strongest  set  of  desires  wins  the  day. 

Halleck's  comment  on  this  point  is  interesting.  He 
says:  ^^Desire  is  not  always  proportional  to  the  idea 
of  one's  own  selfish  pleasure.  Many  persons,  after  form- 
ing an  idea  of  the  vast  amount  of  earthly  distress, 
desire  to  relieve  it,  and  the  desire  goes  out  in  action,  as 
the  benevolent  societies  in  every  city  testify.  Here  the 
individual  pleasure  is  none  the  less,  but  it  is  secondary, 
coming  from  the  pleasure  of  others.  The  desire  of  the 
near  often  raises  a  stronger  desire  than  the  remote,     A 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    207 

child  frequently  prefers  a  thing  immediately  if  it  is 
only  one  tenth  as  good  as  something  he  might  have  a 
year  hence.  A  student  often  desires  more  the  leisure 
of  to-day  than  the  success  of  future  years.  Though 
admonished  to  study,  he  wastes  his  time  and  thus  loses 
incomparably  greater  future  pleasure  when  he  is  tossed 
to  the  rear  in  the  struggle  for  existence.^^ 

The  result  of  this  weighing  and  balancing  of  the 
desire  is,  or  should  be,  decision  and  choice,  which  then 
passes  into  action.  But  many  persons  seem  unable  to 
^^make  up  their  own  mind/^  and  require  a  push  or  urge 
from  without  before  they  will  act.  Others  decide,  with- 
out proper  use  of  the  intellect,  upon  what  they  call 
"impulse,^^  but  which  is  merely  impatience.  Some  are 
like  the  fabled  donkey  which  starved  to  death  when 
placed  at  an  equal  distance  between  two  equally  at- 
tractive haystacks  and  was  unable  to  decide  towards 
which  to  move.  Others  follow  the  example  of  Jeppe,  in 
the  comedy,  who,  when  given  a  coin  with  which  to  buy 
a  piece  of  soap  for  his  wife,  stood  on  the  corner  delib- 
erating whether  to  obey  orders  or  to  buy  a  drink  with 
the  money.  He  wants  the  drink,  but  realizes  that  his 
wife  will  beat  him  if  he  returns  without  the  soap.  "My 
stomach  says  drink;  my  back  says  soap,^^  says  Jeppe. 
"But/^  finally  he  remarks,  "is  not  a  man^s  stomach 
more  to  him  than  his  back?     Yes,  says  I.^^ 


208    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

The  final  decision  depends  upon  the  striking  a  bal- 
ance between  the  desires, — the  weighing  of  desire  for 
and  desire  against, — desire  for  this  and  desire  for  some- 
thing else.  The  strength  of  the  several  desires  depends 
upon  nearness  and  present  interest  arising  from  atten- 
tion, as  applied  to  the  feelings  and  emotions  arising 
from  heredity,  environment,  experience,  and  education, 
which  constitute  character ;  and  also  upon  the  degree  of 
intellectual  clearness  and  power  in  forming  correct 
judgments  between  the  desires. 

It  must  be  remembered,  however,  that  the  intellect 
appears  not  as  an  opponent  of  the  principle  of  the  satis- 
faction of  desire,  but  merely  as  an  instrument  of  the 
ego  in  determining  which  course  of  action  will  result 
in  the  greatest  ultimate  satisfaction,  direct  or  indirect, 
present  or  future.  For,  at  the  last,  every  individual 
acts  so  as  to  hring  himself  the  greatest  satisfaction, 
immediate  or  future,  direct  or  indirect,  either  personal 
or  through  the  welfare  of  others,  as  this  may  appear  to 
him  at  the  particular  moment  of  deliberation.  We  al- 
ways act  in  the  direction  of  that  which  will  greater 
^^content  our  spirit/^  This  will  be  found  to  be  the  spirit 
of  all  decisions,  although  the  motive  is  often  hidden  and 
difficult  to  find  even  by  the  individual  himself,  many  of 
the  strongest  motives  having  their  origin  in  the  subcon- 
scious planes  of  mentality. 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    209 

(3).    Action. 

The  third  and  final  phase  of  will  is  that  known  as 
action — the  act  of  volition  by  which  the  desire-idea  is 
expressed  in  physical  or  mental  activity.  The  old  con- 
ception of  the  will  held  that  the  decisive  phase  of  the 
will  was  its  characteristic  and  final  phase,  ignoring  the 
fact  that  the  very  essence  or  spirit  of  will  is  bound  up 
with  action.  Even  those  familiar  with  the  newer  con- 
ception frequently  assume  that  the  act  of  decision  is 
the  final  phase  of  will,  ignoring  the  fact  that  we  fre- 
quently decide  to  do  a  thing  and  yet  may  never  carry 
out  the  intention  and  decision.  The  act  of  willing  is 
not  complete  unless  action  is  expressed.  There  must  be 
the  manifestation  of  the  motor  element  or  phase  of  will, 
else  the  will  process  is  incomplete. 

A  weakness  of  this  last  phase  of  will  affects  the  entire 
will  and  renders  its  processes  ineffective.  The  world  is 
filled  with  persons  who  are  able  to  decide  what  is  best 
to  do,  and  what  should  be  done,  but  who  never  actually 
act  upon  the  decision.  The  few  persons  who  promptly 
follow  up  the  decision  with  vigorous  action  are  those 
who  accomplish  the  world^s  work.  Without  the  full 
manifestation  of  this  third  phase  of  will  the  other  two 
phases  are  useless. 

Types  of  Will. 
So  far  we  have  considered  merely  the  highest  type 


210     YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

of  will — that  which  is  accompanied  by  conscious  delib- 
eration, in  which  the  intellect  takes  an  active  part.  In 
this  process,  not  only  do  the  conflicting  feelings  push 
themselves  forward  with  opposing  claims  for  recogni- 
tion, but  the  intellect  is  active  in  examining  the  case 
and  offering  valuable  testimony  as  to  the  comparative 
merits  of  the  various  claimants  and  the  effect  of  certain 
courses  of  action  upon  the  individual.  There  are,  how- 
ever, several  lower  forms  of  will  manifestation  which  we 
should  briefly  consider  in  passing. 

Reflex  Action. — The  will  is  moved  to  action  by  the 
reflex  activities  of  the  nervous  system  which  have  been 
mentioned  in  the  earlier  chapters  of  this  book.  In  this 
general  type  we  find  unconscious  reflex  action,  such  as 
that  manifested  when  a  sleeper  is  touched  and  moves 
away,  or  when  the  frog's  leg  twitches  when  the  nerve 
end  is  excited.  We  also  find  conscious  reflex  action, 
such  as  that  manifested  by  the  winking  of  the  eye,  or 
the  performance  of  habitual  physical  motion,  such  as  the 
movement  in  walking,  operating  the  sewing  machine  or 
typewriter,  playing  the  piano,  etc. 

Impulsive  Action. — The  will  is  often  moved  to  action 
by  a  dim  idea  or  faint  perception  of  purpose  or  impulse. 
The  action  is  almost  instinctive,  although  there  is  a 
vague  perception  of  purpose.  For  instance,  we  feel  an 
impulse  to  turn  toward  the  source  of  a  strange  sound  or 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.     311 

sight,  or  other  source  of  interest  or  curiosity.  Or  we 
may  feel  an  impulse  arising  from  the  subconscious 
plane  of  our  mind,  causing  a  dimly-conscious  idea  of 
movement  or  action  to  relieve  the  tension.  For  instance, 
one  may  feel  a  desire  to  exercise,  or  to  seek  fresh  air  or 
green  fields,  although  he  had  not  been  thinking  of  these 
things  at  the  time.  These  impulses  arise  from  a  sub- 
conscious feeling  of  fatigue  or  desire  for  change,  which, 
added  to  a  fleeting  idea,  produces  the  impulse.  Unless 
an  impulse  is  inhibited  by  the  will  activities  inspired 
by  other  desires,  habits,  ideas,  or  ideals,  we  act  upon 
it  in  precisely  the  same  way  that  a  young  child  or  ani- 
mal does.  Hoffding  says  of  this  type  of  action :  ^^The 
psychological  condition  of  the  impulse  is,  that  with  the 
momentary  feeling  and  sensation  should  be  combined  a 
more  or  less  clear  idea  of  something  which  may  aug- 
ment the  pleasure  or  diminish  the  pain  of  the  moment.'^ 
Instinctive  Action, — The  will  is  frequently  moved  to 
action  by  an  instinctive  stimulus.  This  form  of  will  ac- 
tivity closely  resembles  the  last  mentioned  form,  and 
often  it  is  impossible  to  distinguish  between  the  two. 
The  activities  of  the  bee  in  building  its  comb  and  storing 
its  honey,  the  work  of  the  silkworm  and  caterpillar  in 
building  their  resting  places,  are  examples  of  this  form 
of  action.  Indeed,  even  the  building  of  the  nest  of  the 
bird  mav  be  so  classed.     In  these  cases  there  is  an  intel- 


212    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

ligent  action  toward  a  definite  end,  but  the  animal  is 
unconscious  of  that  end.  The  experiences  of  the  remote 
ancestors  of  these  creatures  recorded  their  impressions 
upon  the  subconscious  mind  of  the  species,  and  they  are 
transmitted  in  some  way  to  all  of  that  species.  The 
nervous  system  of  every  living  thing  is  a  record  cylinder 
of  the  experiences  of  its  early  ancestors,  and  these  cyl- 
inders tend  to  reproduce  these  impressions  upon  appro- 
priate occasions.  In  preceding  chapters  we  have  shown 
that  even  man  is  under  the  influence  of  instinct  to  a 
greater  extent  than  he  imagines  himself  to  be. 


CHAPTER  XXX. 

Will-Training. 

IT  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that  the  individual 
develop,  cultivate,  and  train  his  will  so  as  to 
bring  it  under  the  influence  of  the  higher  part  of 
his  mental  and  moral  being.  While  the  will  is  used 
most  effectively  in  developing  and  training  the  intel- 
lect and  building  character,  it  itself  must  be  trained 
by  itself  to  habitually  come  under  the  guidance  of  the 
intellect  and  under  the  influence  of  that  which  we  call 
character. 

The  influence  of  the  trained  will  upon  the  several 
mental  faculties  is  most  marked.  There  are  no  facul- 
ties which  may  not  be  cultivated  by  the  will.  The  first 
and  great  task  of  the  will  in  this  direction  is  the  control 
and  direction  of  the  attention.  The  will  determines  the 
kind  of  interest  that  shall  prevail  at  the  moment,  and 
the  kind  of  interest  largely  determines  the  character  of 
the  man,  his  tastes,  his  feelings,  his  thoughts,  his  acts. 
Gordy  says:  "Cooperating  with  a  pre-existing  influ- 
ence, the  will  can  make  a  weaker  one  prevail  over  a 
stronger.  *  *  *  It  determines  which  of  pre-existing 
influences  shall  have  control  over  the  mind.^^ 


214    YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

Moreover,  concentrated  and  continued  attention  de- 
pends entirely  upon  the  exercise  of  the  will.  As  Gordji 
says :  "If  the  will  relaxes  its  hold  upon  the  activities 
of  the  mind,  the  attention  is  liable  to  be  carried  away 
by  any  one  of  the  thousands  of  ideas  that  the  laws  oi 
association  are  constantly  bringing  into  our  minds." 

Even  in  the  matter  of  mental  images  the  will  asserts 
its  sway,  and  the  imagination  may  be  trained  to  be  the 
obedient  servant  of  the  developed  will.  Regarding  the 
influence  of  the  will  upon  character,  Davidson  says: 
"It  is  not  enough  for  a  man  to  understand  correctly  and 
love  duly  the  conditions  of  moral  life  in  his  own  time; 
he  must,  still  further,  be  willing  and  able  to  fulfill  these 
conditions.  And  he  certainly  cannot  do  this  unless  his 
will  is  trained  to  perfect  freedom,  so  that  it  responds, 
with  the  utmost  readiness,  to  the  suggestions  of  his 
discriminating  intelligence  and  the  movements  of  his 
chastened  affections."  Halleck  says:  "We  gradually 
make  our  characters  by  separate  acts  of  will,  just  as  a 
blacksmith  by  repeated  blows  beats  out  a  horseshoe  or  an 
anchor  from  a  shapeless  mass  of  iron.  A  finished  an- 
chor or  horseshoe  was  never  the  product  of  a  single 

blow." 

Training  the  Will. 

Perhaps  the  best  way  to  train  the  will  is  to  use  it 
intelligently,  and  with  a  purpose.     The  training  of  any 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.     315 

faculty  of  the  mind  is  at  the  same  time  a  training  of 
the  will.  The  attention  being  so  closely  allied  to  the 
will,  it  follows  that  a  careful  training  of  attention  will 
result  in  a  strengthening  of  the  will.  The  training  of 
the  emotional  side  of  one's  nature  also  brings  results 
in  the  strengthening  of  the  will. 

Halleck  gives  his  students  excellent  advice  regarding 
the  training  of  the  will.  It  would  be  hard  to  find  any- 
thing better  along  these  lines  than  the  following  from 
his  pen:  ^^Nothing  schools  the  will,  and  renders  it 
ready  for  effort  in  this  complex  world,  better  than 
accustoming  it  to  face  disagreeable  things.  Professor 
James  advises  all  to  do  something  occasionally  for  no 
other  reason  than  that  they  would  rather  not  do  it,  if  it 
is  nothing  more  than  giving  up  a  seat  in  a  street  car* 
He  likens  such  effort  to  the  insurance  that  a  man  pays 
on  his  house.  He  has  something  that  he  can  fall  back 
on  in  time  of  trouble.  A  will  schooled  in  this  way  is 
always  ready  to  respond,  no  matter  how  great  the  emer- 
gency. While  another  would  be  crying  over  spilled 
milk,  the  possessor  of  such  a  will  has  already  found 
another  cow.  *  *  -*^  The  only  way  to  secure  such  a  will 
is  to  practice  dcing  disagreeable  things.  There  are 
daily  opportunities.  *  *  *  A  man  who  had  declared  his 
aversion  to  what  he  deemed  the  dry  facts  of  political 
economy  was  one  day  found  knitting  his  brow  over  a 


216     YOVB  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

eliapter  of  John  Stuart  Mill.  When  a  friend  expressed 
surprise,  the  man  replied:  ^I  am  playing  the  school- 
master with  myself.  I  am  reading  this  because  I  dislike 
it.^  Such  a  man  has  the  elements  of  success  in  him. 
*  *  *  On  the  other  hand,  the  one  who  habitually  avoids 
disagreeable  action  is  training  his  will  to  be  of  no  use 
to  him  at  a  time  when  supreme  effort  is  demanded. 
Such  a  will  can  never  elbow  its  way  to  the  front  in 
life.^^ 

Habits. 

Habits  are  the  beaten  track  over  which  the  will  trav- 
els. The  beaten  path  of  habit  is  the  line  of  least  resist- 
ance to  the  will.  One  who  would  train  his  will  must 
needs  pay  attention  to  providing  it  with  the  proper 
mental  paths  over  which  to  travel.  The  rule  for  the 
creation  of  habits  is  simply  this :  Travel  over  the  men- 
tal path  as  often  as  possible.  The  rule  for  breaking 
undesirable  habits  is  this :  Cultivate  the  opposite  hahit. 
In  these  two  rules  is  expressed  the  gist  of  what  has  been 
written  on  the  subject. 

Professor  Vf illiam  James  has  left  to  the  world  some 
invaluable  advice  regarding  the  cultivation  of  right 
habits.  He  bases  his  rules  upon  those  of  Professor 
Bain,  elaborates  these,  and  adds  some  equally  good  ones. 
We  herewith  quote  freely  from  both  James  and  Bain 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT,     217 

on  this  subject;  it  is  the  best  ever  written  regarding 
habit  building. 

I.  ^^In  the  acquisition  of  a  new  habit,  or  the  leaving 
off  of  an  old  one,  launch  yourself  with  as  strong  and 
decided  an  initiative  as  possible.  This  will  give  your 
new  beginning  such  a  momentum  that  the  temptation 
to  break  down  will  not  occur  as  soon  as  it  otherwise 
might;  and  every  day  during  which  a  breakdown  is 
postponed  adds  to  the  chances  of  it  not  occurring  at 
all.^^ — James. 

II.  ^^Never  suffer  an  exception  to  occur  till  the  new 
habit  is  securely  rooted  in  your  life.  Every  lapse  is  like 
the  letting  fall  of  a  ball  of  string  which  one  is  carefully 
winding  up — a  single  slip  undoes  more  than  a  great 
many  turns  will  wind  again.^' — James.  "It  is  neces- 
sary, above  all  things,  in  such  a  situation,  never  to  lose 
a  battle.  Every  gain  on  the  wrong  side  undoes  the 
effect  of  many  conquests  on  the  right.  The  essential 
precaution  is  so  to  regulate  the  two  opposing  powers 
that  the  one  may  have  a  series  of  uninterrupted  suc- 
cesses, until  repetition  has  fortified  it  to  such  a  degree 
as  to  enable  it  to  cope  with  the  opposition,  under  any 
circumstances.^^ — Bain. 

III.  "Seize  the  very  first  possible  opportunity  to  act 
on  every  resolution  you  make,  and  on  every  emotional 
prompting  you  may  experience  in  the  direction  of  the 


218     YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

habits  you  aspire  to  gain.  It  is  not  in  the  moment  of 
their  forming,  but  in  the  moment  of  their  producing 
motor  effects^  that  resolves  and  aspirations  communicate 
their  new  ^'set'  to  the  brain/' — James,  ^^The  actual 
presence  of  the  practical  opportunity  alone  furnishes 
the  fulcrum  upon  which  the  lever  can  rest,  by  which 
the  moral  will  may  multiply  its  strength  and  raise  itself 
aloft.  He  who  has  no  solid  ground  to  press  against  will 
never  get  beyond  the  stage  of  empty  gesture  making/' 
— Bain, 

IV.  ^^Keep  the  faculty  alive  in  you  by  a  little  gratu- 
itous exercise  every  day.  That  is,  be  systematically 
ascetic  or  heroic  in  little,  unnecessary  points;  do  every 
day  something  for  no  other  reason  than  that  you  would 
rather  not  do  it,  so  that  when  the  hour  of  dire  need 
draws  nigh,  it  may  find  you  not  unnerved  and  untrained 
to  stand  the  test.  *  *  *  The  man  who  has  daily  inured 
himself  to  habits  of  concentrated  attention,  energetic 
volition,  and  self-denial  in  unnecessary  things  Avill  stand 
like  a  tower  when  everything  rocks  around  him,  and 
when  his  softer  fellow  mortals  are  winnowed  like  chaff 
in  the  blast/' — James. 


CHAPTEE  XXXI. 

Will-Tonic- 

IN"  addition  to  the  general  rules  for  developing  and 
training  the  will  given  in  the  preceding  chapter, 
we  ask  you  to  tone  up  and  strengthen  the  will  by 
the  inspiration  to  be  derived  from  the  words  of  some  of 
the  world's  great  thinkers  and  doers.  In  these  words 
there  is  such  a  vital  statement  of  the  recognition,  real- 
ization, and  manifestation  of  that  something  within, 
which  we  call  ^Vill,''  that  it  is  a  dull  soul,  indeed,  which 
is  not  inspired  by  the  contagion  of  the  idea.  These 
expressions  are  the  milestones  on  the  Path  of  Attain- 
ment, placed  by  those  who  have  preceded  us  on  the 
journey.  We  submit  these  quotations  without  com- 
ment ;  they  speak  for  themselves. 

Words  of  the  Wise. 

'They  can  who  think  they  can.  Character  is  a  per- 
fectly educated  will.'^ 

''N"othing  can  resist  the  will  of  a  man  who  knows 
what  is  true  and  wills  what  is  good.^^ 

"In  all  difficulties  advance  and  will,  for  within  vou 


220     YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

is  a  power,  a  living  force,  which  the  more  you  trust  and 
learn  to  use  will  annihilate  the  opposition  of  matter/^ 

^^The  star  of  the  unconquered  will, 
It  rises  in  my  breast, 
Serene  and  resolute  and  still. 
And  calm  and  self-possessed. 

^^So  nigh  is  grandeur  to  our  dust. 

So  near  is  God  to  man. 
When  duty  whispers  low,  ^Thou  must  V 
The  youth  replies,  ^I  can !'  '^ 

^'^The  longer  I  live,  the  more  certain  I  am  that  the 
great  dijfference  between  men,  between  the  feeble  and 
the  powerful,  the  great  and  the  insignificant,  is  en- 
ergy,— invincible  determination, — a  purpose  once  fixed, 
and  then  death  or  victory.  That  quality  will  do  any- 
thing that  can  be  done  in  this  world,  and  no  talents, 
no  circumstances,  no  opportunities  will  make  a  two- 
legged  creature  a  man  without  it.^' — Buxton. 

"The  human  will,  that  force  unseen, 
The  offspring  of  a  deathless  soul, 
Can  hew  a  way  to  any  goal. 
Though  walls  of  granite  intervene. 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT.    331 


U 


a 


You  will  be  what  you  will  to  be; 
Let  failure  find  its  false  content 
In  that  poor  word  environment. 

But  spirit  scorns  it  and  is  free. 

It  masters  time,  it  conquers  space, 
It  cows  that  boastful  trickster,  chance. 
And  bids  the  tyrant  circumstance 

Uncrown  and  fill  a  servant's  place/' 


^^Eesolve  is  what  makes  a  man  manifest;  not  puny 
resolve,  not  crude  determinations,  not  errant  purpose, 
but  that  strong  and  indefatigable  will  which  treads 
down  difficulties  and  danger  as  a  boy  treads  down  the 
heaving  frost  lands  of  winter,  which  kindles  his  eye  and 
brain  with  a  proud  pulse  beat  toward  the  unattainable. 
Will  makes  men  giants/' — Donald  G,  Mitchell, 

"There  is  no  chance,  no  destiny,  no  fate 
Can  circumvent,  or  hinder,  or  control 
The  firm  resolve  of  a  determined  soul. 
Gifts  count  for  nothing,  will  alone  is  great; 
All  things  give  way  before  it  soon  or  late. 
What  obstacle  can  stay  the  mighty  force 
Of  the  sea-seeking  river  in  its  course, 
Or  cause  the  ascending  orb  of  day  to  wait.'^ 
Each  well-born  soul  must  win  what  it  deserves. 


S23     YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT. 

Let  the  fools  prate  of  luck.     The  fortunate 
Is  he  whose  earnest  purpose  never  swerves^ 
Whose  slightest  action,  or  inaction. 
Serves  the  one  great  aim.     Why,  even  death  itself 
Stands  still  and  waits  an  hour  sometimes 
For  such  a  will.'^ 

— Ella  Wheeler  Wilcox. 

"I  have  brought  myself  by  long  meditation  to  the 
conviction  that  a  human  being  with  a  settled  purpose 
must  accomplish  it,  and  that  nothing  can  resist  a  will 
which  will  stake  even  existence  upon  its  fulfillment.'' 
— Lord  Beaconsfield. 

"A  passionate  desire  and  an  unwearied  will  can  per- 
form impossibilities,  or  what  may  seem  to  be  such  to  the 
cold  and  feeble.'' — Sir  John  Simpson. 

"It  is  wonderful  how  even  the  casualties  of  life  seem 
to  bow  to  a  spirit  that  will  not  bow  to  them,  and  yield 
to  subserve  a  design  which  they  may,  in  their  first 
apparent  tendency,  threaten  to  frustrate.  When  a  firm, 
decisive  spirit  is  recognized,  it  is  curious  to  see  how  the 
space  clears  around  a  man  and  leaves  him  room  and 
freedom/' — John  Foster. 

"The  great  thing  about  General  Grant  is  cool  per- 
sistency of  purpose.  He  is  not  easily  excited,  and  he 
has  got  the  grip  of  a  bulldog.     When  he  once  gets  his 


YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO   USE  IT.     223 

teeth  in,  nothing  can  shake  him  off." — Abraham  Lin- 
coln. 

"I  am  bigger  than  anything  that  can  happen  to  me. 
All  these  things  are  outside  my  dooi%  and  Fve  got  the 
hey.  *  *  *  Man  was  meant  to  be,  and  ought  to  be, 
stronger  and  more  than  anything  that  can  happen  to 
him.  Circumstances,  Tate,^  ^Luck,^  are  all  outside; 
and  if  he  cannot  change  them,  he  can  always  heat 
them." — Charles  F.  Lummis.  ; 

^^The  truest  wisdom  is  a  resolute  determination." 

"Impossible  is  a  word  found  only  in  the  dictionary 
of  fools." 

"Circumstances !  I  mahe  circumstances  !" — Napoleon. 

"He  who  fails  only  half  wills." — Suwarrow. 

"That  which  the  easiest  becomes  a  habit  in  us  is  the 
will.  Learn,  then,  to  will  strongly  and  decisively;  thus 
fix  your  floating  life,  and  leave  it  no  longer  to  be  car- 
ried hither  and  thither,  like  a  withered  leaf,  by  every 
wind  that  blows." 

"Man  owes  his  growth  chiefly  to  that  active  striving 
of  the  will, — that  encounter  which  we  call  effort, — and 
it  is  astonishing  to  find  how  often  results  apparently 
impracticable  are  thus  made  possible.  *  *  *  It  is  will — 
force  of  purpose — ^that  enables  a  man  to  do  or  be  what- 
ever he  sets  his  mind  upon  being  or  doing." 

"A  strong,  defiant  purpose  is  many-handed  and  lays 


224     YOUR  MIND  AND  HOW  TO   USE  IT. 

hold  of  whatever  is  near  that  can  serve  it;  it  has  a 
magnetic  purpose  that  draws  to  itself  whatever  is  kin- 
dred. *  *  *  Let  it  be  your  first  study  to  teach  the 
world  that  you  are  not  wood  and  straw;  that  there  is 
some  iron  in  you/' — Munger, 

"If  s  dogged  as  does  it/' — Yorhshire  Proverb. 

"One  talent  with  a  will  behind  it  will  accomplish 
more  than  ten  without  it^  as  a  thimbleful  of  powder  in 
a  rifle^  the  bore  of  whose  barrel  will  give  it  direction, 
will  do  greater  execution  than  a  carload  burned  in  the 
open  air/' — 0.  S,  Mar  den. 

"Will  may  not  endow  man  with  talents  or  capacities ; 
but  it  does  one  very  important  matter — it  enables  him 
to  make  the  best,  the  very  best,  of  his  powers/' — 
Fothergill. 

"Tender-handed  stroke  a  nettle, 
And  it  stings  you  for  your  pains. 
Grasp  it  like  a  man  of  mettle, 
x\nd  it  soft  as  down  remains/' 

"Don't  flinch;  don't  foul;  but  hit  the  line  hard/' — 
Roosevelt. 

"The  more  difficulties  one  has  to  encounter,  within 
and  without,  the  more  significant  and  the  higher  in 
inspiration  his  life  will  be/' 


;.;;  ^''  ■■"' 


i-pi 


\ 


*iH'  •"     ^ 


■Jfi 


^' 


/ 


.>••?  ^ 


/'.\ 


...  '^Al^ 


*4-    >i 


;■    ♦"t*^ 


»*!>.• 
"A*^.;*- 


■J^.: 


T^' 


3  1197  00188  3518 


DATE  DUE 


dEt  Z  7  1996 


m^im 


tftr 


SFP  2  9  m 


^  tm, 


f^P^  1  ^  ?nin 


666t  Q  I  MVW 


DEC  0 1  20tn 


OCT  7 1  ?noi 


JAN  2  5  2011 


OCT  0  4  2001 


MAR  26?^"" 


-Lii 


.vi\ 


MAY  3 1 2003 


»  5  ■  ■■  = 

1;   S  i  !'' 


f-  -  « -.  rf', 


JUNTTW 


MAY  2  H  2004 


m?  '^  ^  t^ 


DEMCO,  INC.  38-2971